Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutFMB specs 09-06-2013-rev1.pdfPROJECT MANUAL NEW BRANCH BANK INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA FOR OMS PROJECT NO. 13017 SEPTEMBER 6, 2013 13017 ©2013 OMS CERTIFICATION PAGE 00005 - 1 PROJECT: NEW BRANCH BANK – FIRST MERCHANTS BANK 10210 North Michigan Road Carmel, IN 46032 OWNER: FIRST MERCHANTS CORPORATION 10333 North Meridian Street Indianapolis, IN 46290 CONSTRUCTION HOKANSON COMPANIES, INC MANAGER: 201 West 103rd Street, Suite 400 Indianapolis, IN 46290 317-633-6300 FAX 317-633-8070 Project Manager: Christopher M. Horsley; cmh@hokansoninc.com ARCHITECT/ ODLE McGUIRE SHOOK LANDSCAPE 429 North Pennsylvania Street, Suite 403 ARCHITECT: Indianapolis, IN 46204 317-842-0000 FAX 317-917-0616 Project Manager: Gerard J. Skibinski, AIA; gskibinski@omscorp.net CIVIL ENGINEER: CIVIL & ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTS, INC. 530 E. Ohio Street, Suite G Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 317-655-7777 FAX 317-746-0749 Project Manager: Becky Feigh, bfeigh@cecinc.com STRUCTURAL SMITH/ROBERTS & ASSOCIATES, INC. ENGINEER: 6501 Bluff Road Indianapolis, IN 46217 317-951-1043 FAX 317-951-2160 Project Manager: Jeff Lunsford, P.E., jlunsford@sraeng,com MEP ENGINEER: JOHN OBERLIES CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC. 10 S. New Jersey Street, Suite 320 Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 317-636-3941 FAX 317-636-3963 Project Manager: Samuel L. Hurt, P.E., shurt@oberliesengrg.com OMS PROJECT NO.: 13017 DATED: September 6, 2013 CERTIFICATION: Gerard J. Skibinski, AIA, IN AR900011 Project Manager 13017 ©2013 OMS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 1 SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS 00005 Certification Page 00010 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00212 Bidder's Substitution Request Form 00320 Geotechnical Data DIV01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01110 Summary of Work 01230 Alternates 01250 Modification Procedures 01291 Application for Payment 01310 Coordination 01315 Project Meetings 01330 Submittals 01421 Reference Standards and Definitions 01453 Quality Control Services 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01565 Erosion and Settlement Control 01600 Materials and Equipment 01630 Product Substitutions 01650 Starting of Systems 01722 Field Engineering 01732 Cutting and Patching 01770 Contract Closeout 01787 Warranties DIV02 SITEWORK 02361 Termite Control DIV04 MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies DIV06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06400 Interior Architectural Woodwork DIV07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07215 Building Insulation and Exterior Sheathing 07241 Exterior Insulation & Finish System – Class PB 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07901 Joint Sealants DIV08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08112 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08305 Access Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIV09 FINISHES 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09310 Ceramic Tile 09510 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09651 Resilient Flooring 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09690 Carpet Tile 13017 ©2013 OMS TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 2 09805 Concrete Floor Coatings 09900 Painting 09950 Wall Coverings DIV10 SPECIALTIES 10520 Fire-Protection Specialties 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIV12 FURNISHINGS 12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds and Shades End of Table of Contents 13017 ©2013 OMS BIDDER’S SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00212 - 1 BIDDER'S SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM The Owner will consider substitutions from Bidders only. Send to: Odle McGuire Shook OMS Project No: 13017 429 North Pennsylvania Street, Suite 403 Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 Project Name: New Branch Bank – First Merchants Bank Indianapolis, Indiana We submit for your consideration the following Product instead of the specified Product for the above Project: Section No. Paragraph No. Specified Product Proposed Substitution: Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable. Include complete information on changes to the Drawings and Specifications which this proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Fill in blanks below: A. Does this product affect dimensions indicated on the Drawings? B. Will you pay for changes to the design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the substituted product? C. What affect does this substitution have on other installers? D. Describe the differences between substituted product and specified Product? E. Is the manufacturer's warranty of the substituted product the same as the warranty for the specified Product? . If not explain in an attachment to this Form. The undersigned states that the function, appearance, and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified Product. Submitted by Bidder: (One who submits a Bid to the Owner.) For use by OMS Signature [ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as noted [ ] Not Accepted [ ] Received too late Firm name By Address Date Remarks Date Telephone No. Published in Addendum No. _______ 13017 ©2013 OMS ADDENDUM NO. 1 00320 - 1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA DESCRIPTION A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project. This report was obtained for design purposes. It may be inspected at the office of the Architect. A copy of the report is Appended to this Section. Soil information relating to borings, materials encountered, and groundwater was prepared by the Owner's geotechnical consultant and is furnished for the information and convenience of the Bidder. Because the borings and investigations represent a very small sampling in relation to the entire construction site, the Owner, Architect, and geotechnical consultant, do not warrant the conditions below the depth of the borings or that the conditions, observations, and informa- tion gathered from the borings are typical of materials which may be encountered between the borings, outside the borings, or over the entire site. Anyone using the geotechnical report, boring logs, and information shall accept responsibility for its use, conclusions, and interpretations. By making this report available for bidding purposes or by referencing the recommendations of the geotechnical engineer contained in this report within the Specifications, it is agreed that the Bidder, and the Contractor, may rely upon the information contained in the report in the same manner, and for similar purposes, that the Architect/Engineer has relied upon this report to design the building. It is understood and agreed that the Owner cannot and does not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of such information. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder may, at Bidder's own expense and upon written approval of the Owner, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies, and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface, and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for providing the Work in accordance with the time, price, and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Alt & Witzig Geotechnical Report, dated August 13, 2013 follows; 39 pages. END OF GEOTECHNICAL DATA SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION & GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FIRST MERCHANTS BANK CARMEL, INDIANA A&W PROJECT NO: 13IN0404 PREPARED BY: ALT & WITZIG ENGINEERING, INC. GEOTECHNICAL DIVISION PREPARED FOR: HOKANSON COMPANIES, INC. CARMEL, INDIANA AUGUST 13, 2013 A lt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 4105 West 99th Street • Carmel, Indiana 46032 (317) 875-7000 • Fax (317) 876-3705 Offices: Cincinnati, Ohio • Dayton, Ohio Indianapolis • Evansville • Ft. Wayne • Lafayette • South Bend • Terre Haute, Indiana Subsurface Investigation and Foundation Engineering Construction Materials Testing and Inspection Environmental Services August 13, 2013 Hokanson Companies, Inc. 201 W. 103rd Street, Suite 400 Indianapolis, Indiana 46290 ATTN: Mr. Steve Bolton RE: Subsurface Investigation & Geotechnical Recommendations First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 Dear Mr. Bolton: In compliance with your request, we have conducted a subsurface investigation and evaluation for the above referenced project. It is our pleasure to transmit herewith two (2) copies of our report. The purpose of this subsurface investigation was to determine the various soils profile components, the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials, and to provide criteria for use by the design engineers in assessing the site for construction, preparation of site grading plans, and determination of appropriate foundation types. A detailed discussion of our subsurface investigation results and recommendations are presented herein. We appreciated the opportunity to work with you on this project. Often, because of design and construction details that occur, questions arise concerning the soils conditions. If we can give further service in these matters, please contact us at your convenience. Very truly yours, Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Brian A. Wirt, P.E. David C. Harness, P.E. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 1 DESCRIPTION OF SITE ................................................................................................................... 2 FIELD INVESTIGATION .................................................................................................................. 3 LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS ................................................................................................ 5 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... 6 GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................. 8 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................ 11 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 13 APPENDIX Recommended Specifications for Compacted Fills and Backfills Excavation Details in Unstable Material Site Location Map Boring Location Plan Records of Subsurface Exploration General Notes USGS Design Maps Summary Report Custom Soil Resource Report for Hamilton County F:\Projects\13\13IN0404\Geo Good\13IN0404 Geotech Report.docx 1 Alt & Witzig File:13IN0404 SSUUBBSSUURRFFAACCEE IINNVVEESSTTIIGGAATTIIOONN AANNDD GGEEOOTTEECCHHNNIICCAALL RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDAATTIIOONNSS INTRODUCTION General This report presents the results of a subsurface investigation performed for the proposed First Merchants Bank to be constructed in Carmel, Indiana. Our investigation was conducted for Hokanson Companies, Inc. of Indianapolis, Indiana. Authorization to perform this investigation was in the form of a proposal prepared by Alt & Witzig, Engineering, Inc. and accepted by Mr. Boyd Zoccola with Hokanson Companies, Inc. The scope of this investigation included a review of geological maps of the area and a review of geologic and related literature; a reconnaissance of the immediate site; a subsurface exploration; field and laboratory testing; and engineering analysis and evaluation of the materials. The purpose of this subsurface investigation was to determine the various soils profile components, the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials, and to provide criteria for use in assessing the site for construction and evaluating subsurface conditions. A Phase I Environmental Site Assessment was conducted in conjunction with this investigation and will be presented under separate cover. 2 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 DESCRIPTION OF SITE Site Location The site is located in Carmel, Indiana. Specifically, the site is located on the west side of the intersection N. Michigan Road and Retail Parkway. The area may be located using the Carmel, Indiana 7½ Minute Topographic Map in Section 7, Township 17 North and Range 3 East. The general vicinity of the site is indicated in the Site Location Map included in the Appendix of this report. A 2012 aerial photograph of the site is presented in Figure 1 below. Figure 1: 2012 Aerial Photograph Site Topography and Drainage The site is relatively flat an estimated relief of less than three (3) feet. Drainage is primarily along the ground surface into low lying areas and toward storm sewers located near the site. The site was previously developed, but all structures and pavement have since been removed. The lots located to the north and south of the site are currently under construction. 3 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 FIELD INVESTIGATION General Field investigations to determine the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials included a reconnaissance of the project site and performing five (5) borings located approximately as shown on the Boring Location Plan, performing standard penetration tests, and obtaining soil samples retained in the standard spilt-spoon sampler for further laboratory testing. The apparent groundwater level at each boring location was also determined. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The soil borings were drilled using an all-terrain mounted drilling rig equipped with a rotary head. Hollow-stem augers were used to advance the holes. The advancement of the borings was temporarily stopped at regular intervals in order to perform standard penetration tests in accordance with ASTM Procedure D-1586. The standard penetration test involves driving a split spoon soil sampler into the ground by dropping a 140-pound hammer, thirty (30) inches. The number of hammer drops required to advance the split-spoon sampler one (1) foot into the soil is defined as the standard penetration value. The soil samples retained in the split-spoon sampling device as a result of the penetration tests were obtained, classified, and labeled for further laboratory investigation. Water Level Measurements The apparent groundwater level at each boring location was measured during and upon completion of the drilling operations. These water level measurements consisted of observing the depth at which water was encountered on the drilling rods during the soil sampling procedure and measuring the depth to the top of any water following removal of the hollow stem augers. It should be noted that the groundwater level measurements recorded on the individual Records of Subsurface Exploration in the Appendix of this report are accurate only for the specific dates on which the measurements were performed. It must be understood that the groundwater levels will fluctuate throughout the year and the Records of Subsurface Exploration do not indicate these fluctuations. 4 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 Ground Surface Elevation Ground surface elevations were not available at the time of this report. All depths reported on the Records of Subsurface Exploration are from the existing ground surface at the time of the drilling operations. 5 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS In addition to the field investigations, a supplemental laboratory investigation was conducted to ascertain additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials at the site of the proposed First Merchants Bank. All phases of the laboratory investigation were conducted in accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The laboratory testing program included a supplemental visual classification and water content tests on most of the cohesive samples. Selected samples of the cohesive soil from the spoon-sampling device were tested in unconfined compression by use of a calibrated spring testing machine. In addition, a calibrated soil penetrometer was used as an aid in determining the strength of the soil. The values of the unconfined compressive strength as determined on soil samples from the split-spoon sampling must be considered, recognizing the manner in which they were obtained since the split-spoon sampling techniques provide a representative but somewhat disturbed soil sample. 6 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of foundation materials encountered have been visually classified and are described in detail on the Records of Subsurface Exploration. The results of the field penetration tests, strength tests, water level observations and laboratory water contents are presented on the Records of Subsurface Exploration in numerical form. Representative samples of the soils encountered in the field were placed in sample jars and are now stored in our laboratory for further analysis if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, all samples will be disposed of after two (2) months. Soil Conditions Borings B-2, B-3, and B-5 encountered shallow fill/disturbed soils from beneath the ground surface to depths ranging from three (3) to five (5) feet. The disturbed soils are likely due to the previous development. The remaining borings encountered medium stiff to stiff cohesive soils extending from the ground surface to the termination depths of the borings, which ranged from eleven (11) to sixteen (16) feet below the ground surface. Detailed soil descriptions at each boring location have been included on the Records of Subsurface Exploration in the Appendix of this report. According to the Soil Survey of Hamilton County, Indiana published by the United States Department of Agriculture Soil Conservation Service, the majority of the soils covering this site are classified as Brookston Silty Clay Loam (Br) and Crosby Silt Loam (CrA). The Custom Soil Resource Report for Hamilton County, Indiana has been included in the Appendix. Seismic Consideration Based on information obtained in our subsurface investigation and our knowledge of soils in the area, the site may be classified with a Site Class D in accordance with the 2006 International Building Code guidelines. It should be noted that the site class is based on the soil borings and data obtained from the Indiana GIS. 7 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 Groundwater Groundwater levels taken up to 24 hours after completion of the drilling operations indicates a groundwater level as shallow as four (4) feet beneath the ground surface. The exact location of the water table may fluctuate somewhat depending upon normal seasonal variations in precipitation and surface runoff. The Soil Survey of Hamilton County, Indiana indicates a seasonal high groundwater table ranging from the ground surface to two (2) feet below the existing grade during the wetter portions of the year. Again, it should be noted that the groundwater level measurements recorded on the individual Records of Subsurface Exploration included in the appendix of this report, are accurate only for the dates on which the measurements were performed. The exact location of the water table should be anticipated to fluctuate somewhat depending upon normal seasonal variations in precipitation and surface runoff. 8 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION & RECOMMENDATIONS Project Description Based on information provided by the client, it is anticipated that the structure will consist of a 2,790 square foot, single-story building constructed as a slab-on-grade. Paved parking and drive areas are to be constructed as well. The location of the soil borings in relation to the layout of the site is shown on the enclosed Boring Location Plan. Grading plans were not available at the time of this investigation. It is recommended that when the grading plan is available, this information be provided to Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Some modifications may be necessary due to this information. It is assumed that structural loads for the building will be transferred to the soils by continuous wall footings founded at a shallow depth, if possible. Structural loads were not available at the time of this report. It is assumed that the structured will be lightly to moderately loaded, with column and wall loads on the order of 100 kips and 4 klf, respectively. Once final design loads are available, they should be submitted to Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. for review. After a review of this information, it will be determined if changes to these recommendations are warranted. Geotechnical Recommendations Considering the encountered soil conditions at the boring locations, the anticipated loads of the structure, and the relative economics of the available foundation types, conventional spread and continuous wall footings founded at a shallow depth appear to represent a feasible foundation solution for this project. Net allowable bearing pressures of 2,000 and 1,600 psf are recommended for dimensioning spread footings and continuous wall footings, respectively, provided they are founded on firm natural soils or compacted fill. Some undercutting due to fills/disturbed soils may be necessary in the areas of borings B-2, B-3, and B-5. Additionally, due to the developed nature of the surrounding area, some shallow disturbed soils should be anticipated at the site. It is recommended that a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. inspect all foundation excavations prior to the placement of concrete. At the time of this inspection, Housel penetrometer or other approved tests may be performed in order to verify the presence of suitable soil materials. 9 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 Using the above mentioned bearing pressures and recommendations, total settlements of less than one (1) inch and differential settlements of one half (½) inch or less can be anticipated. In utilizing the above-mentioned net allowable pressures for dimensioning footings, it is necessary to consider only those loads applied above the finished floor elevation. In order to alleviate the effects of seasonal variations in moisture content on the behavior of the footings and eliminate the effects of frost action, all foundations should be founded a minimum of three (3) feet below the final grade. Floor Slab Recommendations It is typically desirable to place the floor slab as a slab-on-grade supported by the soil. In the areas where the existing grade is above the final floor elevation, the building area should be undercut and a granular material placed beneath the slab. In those areas where the existing grade is below the final floor elevation, a well-compacted structural fill will be necessary to raise the site to the desired grade. All fill materials may consist of onsite materials with the exception of topsoil or other approved borrow materials if proper moisture content and compaction procedures are maintained. Prior to elevating the site, the existing subgrade soils must be proofrolled with approved equipment. It is recommended that a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. be present to determine the exact depth of undercutting and to monitor backfilling operations. Areas of shallow unstable materials should be anticipated in some areas due to the elevated moisture contents of the shallow soils. Where these areas are determined to exist may require stabilization. The exact stabilization method used will be dependent upon the size of the area and the types of materials encountered, as well as the project schedule. Due to the number of variables involved, it is recommended that the owner, the contractor, and a field representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. determine the stabilization method at the time of necessity. After the building area has been raised to the proper elevation, a granular fill should be placed immediately beneath all floor slabs. It is recommended that the materials within the subgrade area, above footing elevation, be compacted to a minimum density of 93% of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D-1557. 10 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 Pavement Recommendations The strength of the subgrade soils at this site will depend upon several variables including drainage and compaction. It is extremely important that all paved areas be designed to prevent water from collecting or ponding immediately beneath the pavement. This can be accomplished by sheet draining the parking area and sloping the subgrade soils and outletting them to a drain or a ditch to allow for subgrade drainage, or by the installation of a subsurface drainage system. For these soils to provide adequate support for pavement, it will also be necessary that the earthmoving contractor follow proper site work techniques. The exposed subgrade should be proof-rolled with equipment approved by a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. This proof-rolling will assist in identifying pockets of soft unstable materials beneath exposed subgrades. Areas that fail the proofroll should be stabilized as previously as discussed in the floor slab section of this report. In areas where fill will be required to raise the site to proposed grade, the performance of the pavements will be greatly affected by the quality of compaction achieved in the subgrade soils. Thus, it is recommended that all pavement areas be compacted to 93 percent of the material’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557. 11 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Site Preparation Excessively organic topsoil and loose dumped fill materials will generally undergo high volume changes that are detrimental to the behavior of pavements, floor slabs, structural fills, and foundations placed upon them. It is recommended that all topsoil and/or loose materials be stripped from the construction areas and wasted or stockpiled for later use. The depth and consistency of these materials will vary across the site. It should be noted that the soil borings only indicate the apparent topsoil and thickness at their specific locations. Borings do not indicate variations in the thickness of this soil layer between selected locations. Thus, borings only provide a general indication of the amount of stripping. The condition of the subgrade at the time of earthmoving operations and the methods used by the contractor will influence the depth of stripping. A representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. in the field should determine the exact depth of stripping and undercutting at the time of stripping operations. It is recommended that after the above-mentioned stripping procedures have been performed, the exposed subgrade should be proofrolled with approved equipment. This proofrolling will determine where pockets of soft unsuitable materials are encountered. It is recommended that a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. be present for this phase of this project. After the existing subgrade soils are excavated to design grade, proper control of subgrade compaction and fill, and structural fill replacement should be maintained in accordance with the Recommended Specifications for Compacted Fills and Backfills, presented in the Appendix of this report; thus minimizing volume changes and differential settlements which are detrimental to behavior of shallow foundations, floor slabs, and pavements. Groundwater Groundwater levels taken up to 24 hours after completion of the drilling operations indicates a groundwater level as shallow as four (4) feet beneath the ground surface. The exact location of the water table will fluctuate depending upon normal seasonal variations in precipitation and surface runoff. 12 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 Depending upon the time of the year and the weather conditions when the excavations are made, seepage from surface runoff may occur into shallow excavations or soften the subgrade soils. Since these foundation materials tend to loosen when exposed to free water, every effort should be made to keep the excavations dry should water be encountered. Sump pumps or other conventional dewatering procedures should be sufficient for this purpose. It is also recommended that all concrete for footings be poured the same day as the excavation is made. 13 Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0404 SUMMARY A subsurface exploration and engineering evaluation of the foundation conditions has been conducted for the proposed First Merchants Bank in Carmel, Indiana. The exploration and analysis reported herein is considered in sufficient detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for preliminary design. The recommendations submitted are based on the available soil information and assumed design details enumerated in this report. If actual design details differ from those specified in this report, this information should be brought to the attention of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. so that it may be determined if changes in the foundation recommendations are required. If deviations from the noted subsurface conditions are encountered during construction, they should also be brought to the attention of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. APPENDIX RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMPACTED FILLS AND BACKFILLS All fill shall be formed from material free of vegetable matter, rubbish, large rock, and other deleterious material. Prior to placement of fill, a sample of the proposed fill material should be submitted to Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. for his approval. The surface of each layer will be approximately horizontal but will be provided with sufficient longitudinal and transverse slope to provide for runoff of surface water from every point. The fill material should be placed in layers not to exceed eight (8) inches in loose thickness and should be sprinkled with water as required to secure specified compactions. Each layer should be uniformly compacted by means of suitable equipment of the type required by the materials composing the fill. Under no circumstances should a bulldozer or similar tracked vehicles be used as compacting equipment. Material containing an excess of water so the specified compaction limits cannot be attained should be spread and dried to a moisture content that will permit proper compaction. All fill should be compacted to the specified percent of the maximum density obtained in accordance with ASTM density Test D-1557 (95 percent of maximum dry density below the base of footing elevation, 93 percent of maximum dry density beneath floor slabs and pavements). Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate that the specified compaction limits are not obtained; the areas represented by such tests should be reworked and retested as required until the specified limits are reached. Excavation Details in Unstable Material Project Name: First Merchants Bank Prepared By: Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Prepared For: Hokanson Companies, Inc. Project No: 13IN0404 Date: 8-2013 SITE LOCATION MAP USGS Topographic Map: Carmel Quadrangle Township: T 17 N. Range: R 3 E. Section: 7 Site Location N Project Name: First Merchants Bank Prepared By: Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Prepared For: Hokanson Companies, Inc. Project No: 13IN0404 Date: 07/13 BORING LOCATION PLAN Project Name: First Merchants Bank Prepared By: Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Prepared For: Hokanson Companies, Inc. Project No: 13IN0404 Date: 07/13 B-4 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-5 N 16.0 19.5 24.5 14.6 12.6 2.3 2.0 1.5 0.3 Brown and Gray Silty CLAY with Sand Brown and Gray Silty CLAY Brown Silty CLAY with Sand Seams Gray Sandy CLAY with Sand Seams End of Boring at 16 feet 2 Attempts, No Recovery 4.5 9.5 13.0 16.0 5 9 5 7 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SS SS SS SS SS SS CFA Sa m p l e r G r a p h i c s Re c o v e r y G r a p h i c s Gr o u n d W a t e r Hokanson Companies, Inc. ALT & WITZIG FILE # Mo i s t u r e C o n t e n t % Dr y U n i t W e i g h t ( p c f ) PROJECT LOCATION During Drilling TEST DATA Driller S. Gray D-50 Track ATVRig Type Qu - t s f U n c o n f i n e d Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h Po c k e t P e n e t r o m e t e r Groundwater Boring Method - Pressed Shelby Tube Sc a l e ST CA RC CU CT St a n d a r d P e n e t r a t i o n CLIENT - Driven Split Spoon 5 10 15 Dry ft. DC MD Page of1 1 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 7/31/13 30 2 B-1 13IN0404 - Hollow Stem Augers in. STRATA ELEV. SOIL CLASSIFICATION Sample Type PROJECT NAME St r a t a Sa m p l e No . in. - Continuous Flight Augers - Driving Casing - Continuous Tube SURFACE ELEVATION 140 BORING # Te s t , N - b l o w s / f o o t RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION Date Started PP - t s f - Continuous Flight Auger Re m a r k s Carmel, Indiana 7/31/13 HSA De p t h De p t h SS Date Completed Boring Method Hammer Wt.lbs. Hammer Drop Spoon Sampler OD - Rock Core - Cuttings - Mud Drilling At Completion Sa m p l e T y p e 9.0 ft. First Merchants Bank HSA After 24 hours 5.0 ft. Caved Af ter 24 hours at 10.0 ft Caved At Completion 12.0 ft. 14.2 12.8 13.5 13.4 11.9 12.5 3.0 4.3 2.0 1.0 2.3 0.5 Brown Silty CLAY (FILL) Gray Mottled Brown Silty CLAY with Sand Gray Sandy CLAY with Sand Seams End of Boring at 16 feet 3.0 13.0 16.0 9 10 9 8 9 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SS SS SS SS SS SS CFA Sa m p l e r G r a p h i c s Re c o v e r y G r a p h i c s Gr o u n d W a t e r Hokanson Companies, Inc. ALT & WITZIG FILE # Mo i s t u r e C o n t e n t % Dr y U n i t W e i g h t ( p c f ) PROJECT LOCATION During Drilling TEST DATA Driller S. Gray D-50 Track ATVRig Type Qu - t s f U n c o n f i n e d Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h Po c k e t P e n e t r o m e t e r Groundwater Boring Method - Pressed Shelby Tube Sc a l e ST CA RC CU CT St a n d a r d P e n e t r a t i o n CLIENT - Driven Split Spoon 5 10 15 Dry ft. DC MD Page of1 1 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 7/31/13 30 2 B-2 13IN0404 - Hollow Stem Augers in. STRATA ELEV. SOIL CLASSIFICATION Sample Type PROJECT NAME St r a t a Sa m p l e No . in. - Continuous Flight Augers - Driving Casing - Continuous Tube SURFACE ELEVATION 140 BORING # Te s t , N - b l o w s / f o o t RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION Date Started PP - t s f - Continuous Flight Auger Re m a r k s Carmel, Indiana 7/31/13 HSA De p t h De p t h SS Date Completed Boring Method Hammer Wt.lbs. Hammer Drop Spoon Sampler OD - Rock Core - Cuttings - Mud Drilling At Completion Sa m p l e T y p e ft. First Merchants Bank HSA After 24 hours 7.0 ft. Caved Af ter 24 hours at 10.0 ft 17.1 22.8 22.6 11.3 11.6 10.7 3.0 1.0 1.5 2.8 2.8 1.6 3.0 Dark Brown Silty CLAY with Crushed Stone (FILL) Brown and Gray Silty CLAY (FILL) Brown and Gray Silty CLAY with Sand Brown Silty CLAY with Sand Gray Sandy CLAY End of Boring at 16 feet 1.6 5.0 7.0 12.0 16.0 20 11 9 14 15 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 SS SS SS SS SS SS CFA Sa m p l e r G r a p h i c s Re c o v e r y G r a p h i c s Gr o u n d W a t e r Hokanson Companies, Inc. ALT & WITZIG FILE # Mo i s t u r e C o n t e n t % Dr y U n i t W e i g h t ( p c f ) PROJECT LOCATION During Drilling TEST DATA Driller S. Gray D-50 Track ATVRig Type Qu - t s f U n c o n f i n e d Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h Po c k e t P e n e t r o m e t e r Groundwater Boring Method - Pressed Shelby Tube Sc a l e ST CA RC CU CT St a n d a r d P e n e t r a t i o n CLIENT - Driven Split Spoon 5 10 15 Dry ft. DC MD Page of1 1 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 7/31/13 30 2 B-3 13IN0404 - Hollow Stem Augers in. STRATA ELEV. SOIL CLASSIFICATION Sample Type PROJECT NAME St r a t a Sa m p l e No . in. - Continuous Flight Augers - Driving Casing - Continuous Tube SURFACE ELEVATION 140 BORING # Te s t , N - b l o w s / f o o t RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION Date Started PP - t s f - Continuous Flight Auger Re m a r k s Carmel, Indiana 7/31/13 HSA De p t h De p t h SS Date Completed Boring Method Hammer Wt.lbs. Hammer Drop Spoon Sampler OD - Rock Core - Cuttings - Mud Drilling At Completion Sa m p l e T y p e Dry ft. First Merchants Bank HSA After 24 hours 4.0 ft. Caved Af ter 24 hours at 8.0 ft Caved At Completion 13.5 ft. 9.3 24.3 26.4 15.1 1.5 0.5 1.5 1.6 Brown and Gray Silty CLAY (FILL) Gray Silty CLAY (Possible Fill) Brown and Gray Silty CLAY Brown Silty CLAY with Sand End of Boring at 11 feet 2 Attempts, No Recovery 1.8 4.5 7.0 11.0 12 6 6 13 12 1 2 3 4 5 SS SS SS SS SS CFA Sa m p l e r G r a p h i c s Re c o v e r y G r a p h i c s Gr o u n d W a t e r Hokanson Companies, Inc. ALT & WITZIG FILE # Mo i s t u r e C o n t e n t % Dr y U n i t W e i g h t ( p c f ) PROJECT LOCATION During Drilling TEST DATA Driller S. Gray D-50 Track ATVRig Type Qu - t s f U n c o n f i n e d Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h Po c k e t P e n e t r o m e t e r Groundwater Boring Method - Pressed Shelby Tube Sc a l e ST CA RC CU CT St a n d a r d P e n e t r a t i o n CLIENT - Driven Split Spoon 5 10 Dry ft. DC MD Page of1 1 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 7/31/13 30 2 B-4 13IN0404 - Hollow Stem Augers in. STRATA ELEV. SOIL CLASSIFICATION Sample Type PROJECT NAME St r a t a Sa m p l e No . in. - Continuous Flight Augers - Driving Casing - Continuous Tube SURFACE ELEVATION 140 BORING # Te s t , N - b l o w s / f o o t RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION Date Started PP - t s f - Continuous Flight Auger Re m a r k s Carmel, Indiana 7/31/13 HSA De p t h De p t h SS Date Completed Boring Method Hammer Wt.lbs. Hammer Drop Spoon Sampler OD - Rock Core - Cuttings - Mud Drilling At Completion Sa m p l e T y p e 8.0 ft. First Merchants Bank HSA After 24 hours 4.0 ft. Caved Af ter 24 hours at 7.0 ft Caved At Completion 8.5 ft. 22.2 17.7 13.5 11.9 1.5 0.5 0.5 2.3 Crushed Stone Gray Mottled Brown Silty CLAY Brown and Gray Silty CLAY with Sand End of Boring at 11 feet 1.0 3.5 11.0 6 7 9 6 13 1 2 3 4 5 SS SS SS SS SS CFA Sa m p l e r G r a p h i c s Re c o v e r y G r a p h i c s Gr o u n d W a t e r Hokanson Companies, Inc. ALT & WITZIG FILE # Mo i s t u r e C o n t e n t % Dr y U n i t W e i g h t ( p c f ) PROJECT LOCATION During Drilling TEST DATA Driller S. Gray D-50 Track ATVRig Type Qu - t s f U n c o n f i n e d Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h Po c k e t P e n e t r o m e t e r Groundwater Boring Method - Pressed Shelby Tube Sc a l e ST CA RC CU CT St a n d a r d P e n e t r a t i o n CLIENT - Driven Split Spoon 5 10 Dry ft. DC MD Page of1 1 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 7/31/13 30 2 B-5 13IN0404 - Hollow Stem Augers in. STRATA ELEV. SOIL CLASSIFICATION Sample Type PROJECT NAME St r a t a Sa m p l e No . in. - Continuous Flight Augers - Driving Casing - Continuous Tube SURFACE ELEVATION 140 BORING # Te s t , N - b l o w s / f o o t RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION Date Started PP - t s f - Continuous Flight Auger Re m a r k s Carmel, Indiana 7/31/13 HSA De p t h De p t h SS Date Completed Boring Method Hammer Wt.lbs. Hammer Drop Spoon Sampler OD - Rock Core - Cuttings - Mud Drilling At Completion Sa m p l e T y p e 7.0 ft. First Merchants Bank HSA After 24 hours 4.0 ft. Caved Af ter 24 hours at 7.0 ft Caved At Completion 8.0 ft. Project: First Merchants Bank Location: Carmel, Indiana Number: 13IN0404 MAT ERIAL GRAPHICS LEGEND GENERAL NOTES Apparent water level noted while drilling. CL-ML: USCS Low Plasticity Silty Clay CLS: USCS Low Plasticity Sandy Clay FILL: Fill (made ground) Apparent water level noted upon completion. Apparent water level noted upon delayed time. SS: Split Spoon SOIL PROPERTY SYMBOLS Standard "N" penetration value. Blows per foot of a 140-lb hammer falling 30" on a 2" O.D. split-spoon.N: PP:Pocket Penetrometer, tsf LL: Qu:Unconfined Compressive Strength, tsf Plastic Limit, %PL:Liquid Limit, %PI:Plasticity Index, % DRILLING AND SAMPLING SYMBOLS SAMPLER SYMBOLS RELATIVE DENSITY & CONSISTANCY CLASSIFICATION (NON-COHESIVE SOILS) TERM BLOWS PER FOOT Very Loose Loose Medium Dense Dense Very Dense 0 - 5 6 - 10 11 - 30 31 - 50 >51 RELATIVE DENSITY & CONSISTANCY CLASSIFICATION (COHESIVE SOILS) TERM BLOWS PER FOOT Very Soft Soft Medium Stiff Stiff Very Stiff Hard 0 - 3 4 - 5 6 - 10 11 - 15 16 - 30 >31 GROUNDWATER SYMBOLS GE N E R A L N O T E S - P R O J E C T S P E C I F I C 1 3 I N 0 4 0 4 G I N T . G P J U S E V A L . G D T 8 / 1 3 / 1 3 Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 4105 West 99th St. Carmel, IN 46032 Telephone: 317-875-7000 Fax: 317-876-3705 User–Specified Input 2006/2009 International Building Code (which utilizes USGS hazard data available in 2002) 39.9347°N, 86.23482°W Site Class D – “Stiff Soil” I/II/III USGS–Provided Output Design Maps Summary Report Building Code Reference Document Site Coordinates Site Soil Classification Occupancy Category SS = 0.186 g SMS = 0.297 g SDS = 0.198 g S1 = 0.081 g SM1 = 0.195 g SD1 = 0.130 g Although this information is a product of the U.S. Geological Survey, we provide no warranty, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy of the data contained therein. This tool is not a substitute for technical subject-matter knowledge. United States Department of Agriculture A product of the National Cooperative Soil Survey, a joint effort of the United States Department of Agriculture and other Federal agencies, State agencies including the Agricultural Experiment Stations, and local participants Custom Soil Resource Report for Hamilton County, Indiana A&W File: 13IN0404 Natural Resources Conservation Service August 8, 2013 Preface Soil surveys contain information that affects land use planning in survey areas. They highlight soil limitations that affect various land uses and provide information about the properties of the soils in the survey areas. Soil surveys are designed for many different users, including farmers, ranchers, foresters, agronomists, urban planners, community officials, engineers, developers, builders, and home buyers. Also, conservationists, teachers, students, and specialists in recreation, waste disposal, and pollution control can use the surveys to help them understand, protect, or enhance the environment. Various land use regulations of Federal, State, and local governments may impose special restrictions on land use or land treatment. Soil surveys identify soil properties that are used in making various land use or land treatment decisions. The information is intended to help the land users identify and reduce the effects of soil limitations on various land uses. The landowner or user is responsible for identifying and complying with existing laws and regulations. Although soil survey information can be used for general farm, local, and wider area planning, onsite investigation is needed to supplement this information in some cases. Examples include soil quality assessments (http://soils.usda.gov/sqi/) and certain conservation and engineering applications. For more detailed information, contact your local USDA Service Center (http://offices.sc.egov.usda.gov/locator/app? agency=nrcs) or your NRCS State Soil Scientist (http://soils.usda.gov/contact/ state_offices/). Great differences in soil properties can occur within short distances. Some soils are seasonally wet or subject to flooding. Some are too unstable to be used as a foundation for buildings or roads. Clayey or wet soils are poorly suited to use as septic tank absorption fields. A high water table makes a soil poorly suited to basements or underground installations. The National Cooperative Soil Survey is a joint effort of the United States Department of Agriculture and other Federal agencies, State agencies including the Agricultural Experiment Stations, and local agencies. The Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) has leadership for the Federal part of the National Cooperative Soil Survey. Information about soils is updated periodically. Updated information is available through the NRCS Soil Data Mart Web site or the NRCS Web Soil Survey. The Soil Data Mart is the data storage site for the official soil survey information. The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination in all its programs and activities on the basis of race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where applicable, sex, marital status, familial status, parental status, religion, sexual orientation, genetic information, political beliefs, reprisal, or because all or a part of an individual's income is derived from any public assistance program. (Not all prohibited bases apply to all programs.) Persons with disabilities who require alternative means 2 for communication of program information (Braille, large print, audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA's TARGET Center at (202) 720-2600 (voice and TDD). To file a complaint of discrimination, write to USDA, Director, Office of Civil Rights, 1400 Independence Avenue, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call (800) 795-3272 (voice) or (202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider and employer. 3 Contents Preface....................................................................................................................2 Soil Map..................................................................................................................5 Soil Map................................................................................................................6 Legend..................................................................................................................7 Map Unit Legend..................................................................................................8 Map Unit Descriptions..........................................................................................8 Hamilton County, Indiana................................................................................10 Br—Brookston silty clay loam......................................................................10 CrA—Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3 percent slopes..............................................10 4 Soil Map The soil map section includes the soil map for the defined area of interest, a list of soil map units on the map and extent of each map unit, and cartographic symbols displayed on the map. Also presented are various metadata about data used to produce the map, and a description of each soil map unit. 5 6 Custom Soil Resource Report Soil Map 44 2 0 7 2 0 44 2 0 7 4 0 44 2 0 7 6 0 44 2 0 7 8 0 44 2 0 8 0 0 44 2 0 8 2 0 44 2 0 8 4 0 44 2 0 7 4 0 44 2 0 7 6 0 44 2 0 7 8 0 44 2 0 8 0 0 44 2 0 8 2 0 44 2 0 8 4 0 565310 565330 565350 565370 565390 565410 565430 565450 565470 565490 565310 565330 565350 565370 565390 565410 565430 565450 565470 565490 39° 56' 6'' N 86 ° 1 4 ' 8 ' ' W 39° 56' 6'' N 86 ° 1 4 ' 0 ' ' W 39° 56' 2'' N 86 ° 1 4 ' 8 ' ' W 39° 56' 2'' N 86 ° 1 4 ' 0 ' ' W N Map projection: Web Mercator Corner coordinates: WGS84 Edge tics: UTM Zone 16N WGS84 04080160240 Feet 010204060 Meters Map Scale: 1:899 if printed on A landscape (11" x 8.5") sheet. MAP LEGEND MAP INFORMATION Area of Interest (AOI) Area of Interest (AOI) Soils Soil Map Unit Polygons Soil Map Unit Lines Soil Map Unit Points Special Point Features Blowout Borrow Pit Clay Spot Closed Depression Gravel Pit Gravelly Spot Landfill Lava Flow Marsh or swamp Mine or Quarry Miscellaneous Water Perennial Water Rock Outcrop Saline Spot Sandy Spot Severely Eroded Spot Sinkhole Slide or Slip Sodic Spot Spoil Area Stony Spot Very Stony Spot Wet Spot Other Special Line Features Water Features Streams and Canals Transportation Rails Interstate Highways US Routes Major Roads Local Roads Background Aerial Photography The soil surveys that comprise your AOI were mapped at 1:15,800. Warning: Soil Map may not be valid at this scale. Enlargement of maps beyond the scale of mapping can cause misunderstanding of the detail of mapping and accuracy of soil line placement. The maps do not show the small areas of contrasting soils that could have been shown at a more detailed scale. Please rely on the bar scale on each map sheet for map measurements. Source of Map: Natural Resources Conservation Service Web Soil Survey URL: http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov Coordinate System: Web Mercator (EPSG:3857) Maps from the Web Soil Survey are based on the Web Mercator projection, which preserves direction and shape but distorts distance and area. A projection that preserves area, such as the Albers equal-area conic projection, should be used if more accurate calculations of distance or area are required. This product is generated from the USDA-NRCS certified data as of the version date(s) listed below. Soil Survey Area: Hamilton County, Indiana Survey Area Data: Version 13, Sep 25, 2012 Soil map units are labeled (as space allows) for map scales 1:50,000 or larger. Date(s) aerial images were photographed: Sep 17, 2011—Mar 28, 2012 The orthophoto or other base map on which the soil lines were compiled and digitized probably differs from the background imagery displayed on these maps. As a result, some minor shifting of map unit boundaries may be evident. Custom Soil Resource Report 7 Map Unit Legend Hamilton County, Indiana (IN057) Map Unit Symbol Map Unit Name Acres in AOI Percent of AOI Br Brookston silty clay loam 0.9 22.0% CrA Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3 percent slopes 3.3 78.0% Totals for Area of Interest 4.2 100.0% Map Unit Descriptions The map units delineated on the detailed soil maps in a soil survey represent the soils or miscellaneous areas in the survey area. The map unit descriptions, along with the maps, can be used to determine the composition and properties of a unit. A map unit delineation on a soil map represents an area dominated by one or more major kinds of soil or miscellaneous areas. A map unit is identified and named according to the taxonomic classification of the dominant soils. Within a taxonomic class there are precisely defined limits for the properties of the soils. On the landscape, however, the soils are natural phenomena, and they have the characteristic variability of all natural phenomena. Thus, the range of some observed properties may extend beyond the limits defined for a taxonomic class. Areas of soils of a single taxonomic class rarely, if ever, can be mapped without including areas of other taxonomic classes. Consequently, every map unit is made up of the soils or miscellaneous areas for which it is named and some minor components that belong to taxonomic classes other than those of the major soils. Most minor soils have properties similar to those of the dominant soil or soils in the map unit, and thus they do not affect use and management. These are called noncontrasting, or similar, components. They may or may not be mentioned in a particular map unit description. Other minor components, however, have properties and behavioral characteristics divergent enough to affect use or to require different management. These are called contrasting, or dissimilar, components. They generally are in small areas and could not be mapped separately because of the scale used. Some small areas of strongly contrasting soils or miscellaneous areas are identified by a special symbol on the maps. If included in the database for a given area, the contrasting minor components are identified in the map unit descriptions along with some characteristics of each. A few areas of minor components may not have been observed, and consequently they are not mentioned in the descriptions, especially where the pattern was so complex that it was impractical to make enough observations to identify all the soils and miscellaneous areas on the landscape. The presence of minor components in a map unit in no way diminishes the usefulness or accuracy of the data. The objective of mapping is not to delineate pure taxonomic classes but rather to separate the landscape into landforms or landform segments that have similar use and management requirements. The delineation of such segments on the map provides sufficient information for the development of resource plans. If intensive use of small areas is planned, however, onsite investigation is needed to define and locate the soils and miscellaneous areas. Custom Soil Resource Report 8 An identifying symbol precedes the map unit name in the map unit descriptions. Each description includes general facts about the unit and gives important soil properties and qualities. Soils that have profiles that are almost alike make up a soil series. Except for differences in texture of the surface layer, all the soils of a series have major horizons that are similar in composition, thickness, and arrangement. Soils of one series can differ in texture of the surface layer, slope, stoniness, salinity, degree of erosion, and other characteristics that affect their use. On the basis of such differences, a soil series is divided into soil phases. Most of the areas shown on the detailed soil maps are phases of soil series. The name of a soil phase commonly indicates a feature that affects use or management. For example, Alpha silt loam, 0 to 2 percent slopes, is a phase of the Alpha series. Some map units are made up of two or more major soils or miscellaneous areas. These map units are complexes, associations, or undifferentiated groups. A complex consists of two or more soils or miscellaneous areas in such an intricate pattern or in such small areas that they cannot be shown separately on the maps. The pattern and proportion of the soils or miscellaneous areas are somewhat similar in all areas. Alpha-Beta complex, 0 to 6 percent slopes, is an example. An association is made up of two or more geographically associated soils or miscellaneous areas that are shown as one unit on the maps. Because of present or anticipated uses of the map units in the survey area, it was not considered practical or necessary to map the soils or miscellaneous areas separately. The pattern and relative proportion of the soils or miscellaneous areas are somewhat similar. Alpha- Beta association, 0 to 2 percent slopes, is an example. An undifferentiated group is made up of two or more soils or miscellaneous areas that could be mapped individually but are mapped as one unit because similar interpretations can be made for use and management. The pattern and proportion of the soils or miscellaneous areas in a mapped area are not uniform. An area can be made up of only one of the major soils or miscellaneous areas, or it can be made up of all of them. Alpha and Beta soils, 0 to 2 percent slopes, is an example. Some surveys include miscellaneous areas. Such areas have little or no soil material and support little or no vegetation. Rock outcrop is an example. Custom Soil Resource Report 9 Hamilton County, Indiana Br—Brookston silty clay loam Map Unit Setting Elevation:720 to 980 feet Mean annual precipitation:36 to 42 inches Mean annual air temperature:49 to 52 degrees F Frost-free period:175 to 185 days Map Unit Composition Brookston and similar soils:100 percent Description of Brookston Setting Landform:Depressions on till plains Landform position (two-dimensional):Footslope Down-slope shape:Concave Across-slope shape:Linear Parent material:Loamy till Properties and qualities Slope:0 to 2 percent Depth to restrictive feature:More than 80 inches Drainage class:Poorly drained Capacity of the most limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat):Moderately high (0.20 to 0.60 in/hr) Depth to water table:About 0 to 12 inches Frequency of flooding:None Frequency of ponding:None Calcium carbonate, maximum content:40 percent Available water capacity:High (about 10.0 inches) Interpretive groups Farmland classification:Prime farmland if drained Land capability (nonirrigated):2w Hydrologic Soil Group:B/D Other vegetative classification:Mixed/Transitional (Mixed Native Vegetation) Typical profile 0 to 11 inches:Silty clay loam 11 to 58 inches:Clay loam 58 to 70 inches:Loam CrA—Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3 percent slopes Map Unit Setting Elevation:720 to 980 feet Mean annual precipitation:36 to 42 inches Mean annual air temperature:49 to 52 degrees F Custom Soil Resource Report 10 Frost-free period:175 to 185 days Map Unit Composition Crosby and similar soils:90 percent Description of Crosby Setting Landform:Till plains Landform position (two-dimensional):Backslope, shoulder, summit Landform position (three-dimensional):Side slope Down-slope shape:Convex Across-slope shape:Linear Parent material:Loess over loamy till Properties and qualities Slope:0 to 3 percent Depth to restrictive feature:20 to 40 inches to densic material Drainage class:Somewhat poorly drained Capacity of the most limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat):Low to moderately high (0.01 to 0.20 in/hr) Depth to water table:About 6 to 24 inches Frequency of flooding:None Frequency of ponding:None Calcium carbonate, maximum content:40 percent Available water capacity:Low (about 5.4 inches) Interpretive groups Farmland classification:Prime farmland if drained Land capability (nonirrigated):2w Hydrologic Soil Group:C/D Other vegetative classification:Trees/Timber (Woody Vegetation) Typical profile 0 to 11 inches:Silt loam 11 to 27 inches:Clay loam 27 to 32 inches:Loam 32 to 60 inches:Loam Custom Soil Resource Report 11 13017 ©2013 OMS SUMMARY OF WORK 01110 - 1 SECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work consists of a new branch bank of approximately 3,650 square feet. The Work includes sitework, architectural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work as indicated on the bidding documents prepared by Odle McGuire Shook, Indianapolis, Indiana and its consultants dated September 6, 2013. 1. Project Location: New Branch Bank 10210 North Michigan Road Carmel, Indiana 46032 2. Owner: First Merchants Corporation 10333 North Michigan Road Indianapolis, Indiana 46290 3. Construction Manager: Hokanson Companies, Inc. 201 W. 103rd Street, Suite 400 Indianapolis, Indiana 46290 1.2 CONTRACTORS' USE OF PREMISES A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the specific Project premises for construction operations, including use of a designated area of the site. B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the sites beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances clear and available to the public, other portions of the site, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials except as approved prior to such use. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 3. Contractor Parking: Limit parking for construction personnel to areas within the project site. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building. 2. Upon occupancy, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building. 1.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Workers shall be fully clothed at all times. Shirts shall not be removed. 13017 ©2013 OMS SUMMARY OF WORK 01110 - 2 B. Radios or other electric (electronic) devices which create music or other noise shall not be allowed. C. Workers creating a disturbance or litter other than that produced by the Work shall be removed from the site. D. Workers on site who are under the influence of alcohol or controlled substances without doctor's prescription shall be removed from the site and the Project. E. Obscene or abusive language, gestures, actions, conduct, or clothing are prohibited. Violators shall be removed from the site and the Project. F. Contractor shall be responsible for his own safety program. Copies of the Contractor's written safety program shall be available on-site. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any responsibility for the Contractor Safety Program nor its implementation. G. The Contractor and his employees shall be solely responsible for their compliance with OSHA and IOSHA rules and regulations. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any responsibility to the Contractor nor his employees for compliance with OSHA or IOSHA rules and regulations. Contractor shall have available on site a copy of all Material Safety Data Sheets. H. Daily cleaning and removing of construction debris shall be the responsibility of the contractor in the areas affected by his/her work that day. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01110 13017 ©2013 OMS ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each Alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. B. Execute accepted Alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. C. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. ALTERNATE NO. 1: WOOD DOOR FRAMES AND DOOR TRIM 1. Alternate includes providing wood door frames and door trim in lieu of steel door frames as indicated in the door schedule. B. ALTERNATE NO. 2: SOLID SURFACE TELLER COUNTERS 1. Alternate includes providing 1/2" thick solid surface material on 3/4" plywood base with 1-1/4” turndowns at exposed edges for countertops at Teller counters in lieu of plastic laminate. END OF SECTION 01230 13017 ©2013 OMS MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1 SECTION 01250 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change to the Architect for review. a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. a. No claim for adjustment to the Contract Time will be considered unless the change effects the "critical path" or similar evaluation, satisfactorily demonstrated to the Architect. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests. 13017 ©2013 OMS MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2 1.4 PROCESSING PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Make written reply to the Architect in response to each Proposal Request. 1. State proposed change in the Contract Sum, if any. This will be broken down to show work by Prime Contractor and work by subcontractors, if any. Labor and materials cost shall be listed separately with quantities and unit prices of both materials and labor. 2. State proposed change in the Contract Time of Completion, if any. 3. Clearly describe other changes in the Work, if any, required by the proposed change. 4. Include full backup data such as subcontractor's letter of proposal or similar information. 5. Submit this response in single copy to the Architect. B. When cost or credit for the change has been agreed upon by Owner and Contractor, or the Owner has directed that cost or credit be determined in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions, the Architect will issue a Change Order to the Contractor. 1.5 PROCESSING CHANGE ORDERS A. Change Orders will be numbered in sequence, and dated. 1. The Change Order will describe the change or changes, will refer to the proposal requests or supplemental instruction involved, and will be signed by the Owner, the Architect, and the Contractor. 2. After the Owner and Architect/Engineer have executed the Change Order, the Architect will issue three (3) copies of each Change Order to the Contractor. a. The Contractor promptly shall sign all three (3) copies and return two (2) to the Architect. b. The Architect will retain one signed copy in his file, and will forward the remaining copy to the Owner. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or the Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 20 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. The Architect will reject claims submitted later than 20 days. 1. Do not include the Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in Contract Documents. 2. No change to the Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714. The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 13017 ©2013 OMS MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 3 B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01250 13017 ©2013 OMS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01291 - 1 SECTION 01291 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each contractor's Applications for Payment. 1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts. B. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals." 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Each Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of Values for its part of the Work with preparation of the Contractors' Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of allowances. e. Schedule of alternates. f. List of products. g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. h. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values for each project to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 14 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. 3. Applications for Payment will not be reviewed and/or approved prior to approval of the Schedule of Values. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. 13017 ©2013 OMS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01291 - 2 f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value (provide separate dollar values for labor and material for each item of work). Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. h. Alternates (provide separate dollar values for labor and material for each item of work). 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items, including products, materials or equipment and labor. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required. b. Provide separate breakout for the Corporate Athletic Complex and Educational Services Center so that the projects can be tracked individually. 6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option. b. At the Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, except that no such line item shall exceed $50,000.00 without a detailed breakdown satisfactory to the Architect. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 13017 ©2013 OMS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01291 - 3 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. E. Transmittal: Submit two (2) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copies shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect. F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction meeting. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. 1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Startup performance reports. f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. g. Final cleaning. h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. i. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. j. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. 13017 ©2013 OMS APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01291 - 4 I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. 6. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 7. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. 9. Change of door locks to Owner's access. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES A. Informal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 1. Make an informal submittal of request for payment by filling in, with erasable pencil, pertinent portions of AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment", plus continuation sheet or sheets. These notes shall include the amounts previously paid the Contractor. All columns of the Continuation Sheet must be complete on the pencil copy. 2. Make this informal submittal to the Architect at the last regular job meeting of each month (one copy). This preliminary submittal will be reviewed by the Architect on or about that date. 3. Revise the submittal of request for payment as indicated by the Architect on the pencil copy, prior to formal submittal. B. Formal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 1. Make formal submittal of request for payment by filling in the agreed data, by typewriter or neat lettering in ink, on AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment," plus continuation sheet or sheets. 2. Sign and notarize the Application and Certificate for Payment. 3. Submit two (2) originals of the Application and Certificate for Payment to the Architect. 4. The Architect will compare the formal submittal with the approved informal submittal and, when approved, will sign the Application and Certificate for Payment, and will distribute two (2) copies to the Owner. 5. The Owner will make payment to the contractor in accordance with the payment provisions in the Agreement. END OF SECTION 01291 13017 ©2013 OMS COORDINATION 01310 - 1 SECTION 01310 - COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including the following: 1. Coordination 2. General project coordination procedures 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel 4. Cleaning and protection B. Progress meetings, coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences are specified in Section "Project Meetings". C. Preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule is specified in Section "Submittals". D. Coordinating general installation is specified in Section "Materials and Equipment". E. Coordinating contract closeout is specified in Section "Contract Closeout". 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include but are not limited to the following: 1. Preparation of schedules and sequencing/phasing of the work 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities 3. Delivery and processing of submittals 13017 ©2013 OMS COORDINATION 01310 - 2 4. Conducting progress meetings and publishing meeting minutes 5. Coordinating tests and inspections 6. Preparation of coordination drawings 7. Protection of each others work 8. Sharing access to work spaces and other work 9. Project closeout activities 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses, telephone numbers and Email addresses. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and at each temporary telephone. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each component, item or unit of Work, to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 1. Contractor is responsible for any and all clean-up. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. END OF SECTION 01310 13017 ©2013 OMS PROJECT MEETINGS 01315 - 1 SECTION 01315 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including: 1. Preconstruction Conference. 2. Preinstallation Conferences. 3. Progress Meetings 4. Coordination Meetings. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Preconstruction conference will be scheduled, by the Architect, before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Contractor, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. The conference will be at the Project Site or another convenient location. B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 8. Preparation of record documents. 9. Use of the premises. 10. Parking availability. 11. Office, work, and storage areas. 12. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 13. Safety procedures. 14. First aid. 15. Security. 16. Housekeeping. 17. Working hours. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Schedule and arrange for a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 13017 ©2013 OMS PROJECT MEETINGS 01315 - 2 B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations. s. Safety. t. Inspecting and testing requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection. 2. Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Architect. 3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Project progress meetings shall be scheduled and conducted by the Contractor, at the Project Site at bi-weekly intervals. B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. 13017 ©2013 OMS PROJECT MEETINGS 01315 - 3 Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to assure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including: a. Interface requirements. b. Time. c. Sequences. d. Status of submittals. e. Deliveries. f. Off-site fabrication problems. g. Access. h. Site utilization. i. Temporary facilities and services. j. Hours of work. k. Hazards and risks. l. Housekeeping. m. Quality and work standards. n. Change Orders. o. Documentation of information for payment requests. D. Reporting: No later than 7 days after each meeting, the Contractor shall distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. E. Schedule Updating: The Contractor shall revise his construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule after each meeting. 1. Within the Project office trailer, provide full size (not 8-1/2 x 11) 30" x 42" minimum wall copies of each iteration/revision of the construction schedule. 2. See Division 1 Section “Submittals” for Contractors’ construction schedule requirements and responsibilities. 1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. All Contractors shall conduct coordination meetings at regular intervals and/or as required and necessary. Project coordination meetings will be scheduled, by the Contractor for General Construction, at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings. B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Contractor shall record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. END OF SECTION 01315 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 1 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Contractor's construction schedule 2. Submittal schedule 3. Daily construction reports 4. Shop Drawings 5. Product Data 6. Samples 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received, including selection of colors. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow not less than three weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow not less than three weeks for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: All submittals shall be sent by the Contractor directly to the Architect. The Architect will not accept submittals from Subcontractors or Suppliers. 1. Samples: Place a permanent label on each sample submitted for identification. Include the following information on the label: a. Project name and Project number 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 2 b. Date c. Name and address of Architect d. Name and address of Contractor e. Name and address of subcontractor f. Name and address of supplier g. Name of manufacturer h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section 2. Shop Drawings: Document normally 11" x 17" and larger, they are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. a. Provide one (1) copy of the drawing(s) for review electronically. b. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" beside the title block of each drawing to record the Contractor's review and approval. The Shop Drawings will be returned without action if the Contractor's stamp is not present. c. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" beside the title block on each drawing for the Architect to apply his review stamp. d. Some shop drawings will require a professional engineer's certification indicating that the shop drawings were prepared by a professional engineer or under the engineer's supervision. The professional engineer must provide his seal on each drawing or provide a letter with his seal listing each drawing prepared and certified. Shop Drawings will not be reviewed with the certification. e. When the specification section requires the submittal of calculations, those calculations must be submitted with the shop drawings and certified by a professional engineer. 3. Product Data: Includes illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, etc. furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials for some portion of the Work. a. The Submittal Cover Sheet at the end of this section will be completed and bound with each copy of the submittal. Contractor approval must be indicated. b. Submit one (1) copy of each submittal electronically for review. C. Transmitting submittals: Package each submittal separately by specification section and appropriately for transmittal and handling. A Submittal Transmittal Record form will be provided by the Architect at the preconstruction meeting. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. D. Distribution of Submittals: Contractor shall furnish copies of approved submittals to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and others required for performance of the construction activities. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. General: Construction schedule described below is the minimum requirement for this Project. A computer generated CPM schedule is also acceptable, provided it delineates the same minimum information. 1. Request for an extension of Contract Time shall be documented by proof that the occurrence, e.g. additional Work requested by Owner, affects the "critical path". 2. Contractor is responsible to expedite approvals and deliveries of material so as not to delay job progress. 3. Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers shall schedule materials, deliveries and installations to conform with the Contract Documents and the Project Construction Schedule. 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 3 B. Bar-Chart Schedule: Contractor shall prepare a fully developed, critical path, horizontal bar- chart type Project Construction Schedule. All subcontractors shall provide input with respect to their specific work scope to the General Contractor as this schedule is generated. Submit the Project Construction Schedule to the Architect within 30 days from the date of the Notice to Proceed. 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". 2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate actual completion. 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 5. Coordinate the construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules. 6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including testing and installation. D. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line, indicating "precalculated" and "actual" costs. On the line show dollar-volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and payment procedures. E. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. F. Schedule Updating: 1. Contractor shall update the Schedule on a monthly basis during the entire life of Contract. 2. The Contractor is responsible for making any and all revisions to the construction schedule. 3. Contractor shall bind himself and his subcontractors to the Work as per the updated/revised schedule from time to time, even though there may be no changes in the schedule for his particular scope of work. a. Contractor shall work overtime, nights, and weekends, if necessary to maintain the project construction schedule. 1) Overtime, night and weekend work will be at no additional cost to the Owner. 2) Failure to maintain the schedule will jeopardize his payment applications being certified by the Architect and forwarded onto the Owner as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract. 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 4 1.5 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; maintain one copy for review by the Owner and the Architect as needed: 1. List of subcontractors at the site 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions 4. Accidents and unusual events 5. Meetings and significant decisions 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses 7. Meter readings and similar recordings 8. Emergency procedures 9. Orders and requests of governing authorities 10. Change Orders received, implemented. 11. Services connected, disconnected. 12. Equipment or system tests and start-ups 13. Partial Completions, occupancies 14. Substantial Completions authorized. 15. Material tests taken 1.6 ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC MEDIA A. Floor Plan Base Drawings are available on electronic media from the Architect. 1. Drawings will be furnished on CD-ROM disk; AutoCAD 2007, or later (the same Release in which the Drawings were created). 2. Floor Plan Base Drawings include walls, doors, windows, dimensions and miscellaneous components within the building (i.e., stairs, casework, and fixed equipment). B. To receive electronic media, submit request on Computer Media Request Form and execute the License Agreement; contact the Architect’s Project Manager for appropriate forms. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards 4. Notation of coordination requirements 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 11" x 17", but no larger than drawings of the Contract Documents. 7. Submittal: Submit one (1) correctable translucent reproducible print and three (3) blue or black-line prints for the Architect=s review; the reproducible print will be returned. All remaining shop drawing sets will be returned to the Contractor. 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 5 8. Distribution: Furnish copies of approved submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. C. Coordination Drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as intended. 1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data. 2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 3. Transmit in same manner as indicated for Shop Drawings. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards d. Application of testing agency labels and seals e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement f. Notation of coordination requirements 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. Contractor will indicate his approval or the Submittal Cover Sheet. 3. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single-copy of Product Data where selection of options is required. 4. Submittals: Submit 1 copy of submittals electronically for review. 5. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data is in the installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. c. Furnish copies of Product Data required for the Maintenance Manuals. 1.9 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 6 1. Mount, display, and package Samples in a manner which will protect them in transit and will facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following information: a. Generic description of the Sample b. Sample source c. Product name or name of manufacturer d. Compliance with recognized standards e. Availability and delivery time 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of these Samples. 3. Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. a. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 4 sets; the Architect will keep one and will return the remaining samples to the Contractor. 5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1.10 FIELD SAMPLES A. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which that portion of the Work will be judged. 1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION 13017 ©2013 OMS SUBMITTALS 01330 - 7 A. Where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return to the Contractor. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. Stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate action taken: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Approved," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved as Noted," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where the Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required". PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET OMS-S403 - Copyright © 2013 The Odle McGuire & Shook Corporation Master Planning • Architecture • Engineering • Landscape Architecture • Interior Design • Technology Design 429 North Pennsylvania Street, Suite 403, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204, 317.842.0000 www.omscorp.net PROJECT: New Branch Bank – First Merchants Bank PROJECT NO: 13017 DATE: ARCHITECT & ENGINEER: Odle McGuire Shook 429 North Pennsylvania Street Suite 403 Indianapolis, IN 46204 (317) 842-0000 CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR / SUPPLIER: MANUFACTURER: SPEC SECTION NO. & TITLE: SUBMITTAL ITEMS: Section No. Title: [ ] First Submission [ ] Re-submittal [ ] Product Data [ ] Shop Drawings [ ] Sample [ ] Warranty [ ] Maintenance Info [ ] Other ARCHITECT/ENGINEER STAMP: OMS’ COMMENTS: CONTRACTOR'S STAMP: OMS Log No: [ ] Approved [ ] Approved as Noted [ ] Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit [ ] Action Not Required The Architect's action upon the Contractor's submittals is for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract for the responsibilities of the Contractor and the Architect. Odle McGuire Shook By Date [ ] See attached Shop Drawing Review Comment Sheet. [ ] This product is a deviation from the Specifications; refer to attached letter describing differences. SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL RECORD Master Planning • Architecture • Engineering • Landscape Architecture • Interior Design • Technology Design 429 North Pennsylvania Street, Suite 403, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204, 317.842.0000 www.omscorp.net OMS-S404 – Copyright © 2013 The Odle McGuire & Shook Corporation Contractor: Project Name: New Branch Bank – First Merchants Bank Architect’s No: 13017 This is a re-submittal. This item does not require review. SPEC SECTION SUBMITTAL NO. DESCRIPTION ACTION BY OMS APP APP AS NOTED NOT APP REVIEWED REVISE / RESUBMIT TRANSMITTAL RECORD DATE SENT DATE REC’D SEPIA PRINT PROD. DATA SAMPLE/ COLOR CHARTS REVIEW BY COPY TO (Sub) Contractor to Contractor Contractor to OMS OMS to Consultant Consultant to OMS OMS to Contractor Contractor to (Sub) Contractor Remarks: A SEPARATE SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL RECORD FORM SHALL BE UTILIZED FOR EACH SPECIFICATION SECTION. 13017 ©2013 OMS REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 1 SECTION 01421 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location. C. Include: The term include, includes or included means a part of a whole. It is not a finite or all inclusive term and shall not limit the scope of the work. It is an example or partial list only. There may be additional items required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. However, no implied meaning shall be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Such approval shall not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. F. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work, whether or not lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Furnish: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. H. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. I. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. J. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term Aexperienced@ when used with the term Installer, means having satisfactorily completed not less than five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements necessary to successfully complete the work indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. a. It also means, being certified or otherwise qualified in writing by the manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, equipment, and training to install the manufacturer’s products in accordance with the specified requirements. 13017 ©2013 OMS REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 2 b. The manufacturer’s willingness to sell its products to the Contractor or the Installer does not in itself confer qualification on the purchaser. 2. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or union member individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. K. Project Site: The project site is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. L. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.2 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division Format and "Masterformat" numbering system. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 13017 ©2013 OMS REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421 - 3 B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level indicated, shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. Maintain one copy of required standards at the Project Site available for reference by persons who have a reasonable need. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. 1.4 GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES A. Copies of Regulations: The Contractor shall obtain copies of the following regulations and maintain at the Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need: 1. Indiana State Codes: Current issue with amendments for the work related to their Contract. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01421 13017 ©2013 OMS QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01453 - 1 SECTION 01453 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Inspections, tests and related actions specified are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Sections, and those required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum. 1. In addition to the above responsibilities, Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, to perform quality control services including earthwork, asphalt paving, concrete, masonry, and steel. B. The Owner may engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform inspections and tests, and to assist in Contract enforcement. 13017 ©2013 OMS QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01453 - 2 1. Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing and inspection of a part of the Work, and Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner. 2. Retesting: Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility. a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by Contractor is Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. 3. Associated Services: Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include: a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. C. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of Contractor. D. Coordination: Contractor and agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition, Contractor and agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect, to Contractor and to such other parties as the Architect or Contractor may direct. 13017 ©2013 OMS QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01453 - 3 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include: a. Date of issue b. Project title and number c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test f. Designation of the Work and test method g. Identification of product and Specification Section h. Complete inspection or test data i. Test results and an interpretations of test results j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing k. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector m. Recommendations on retesting 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State of Indiana. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION 01453 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 1 TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. B. Temporary utilities required include: 1. Water service and distribution 2. Temporary electric power and light 3. Telephone service C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include: 1. Field offices and storage trailers 2. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water 3. Dewatering facilities and drains 4. Temporary enclosures 5. Hoists and cranes of any type 6. Temporary Project identification signs and bulletin boards 7. Waste disposal services 8. Rodent and pest control 9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities D. Security and protection facilities include: 1. Temporary fire protection 2. Barricades, warning signs, lights 3. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site 4. Environmental protection 5. Tree and plant protection 6. Utility protection 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility for which it is responsible within 15 days of date established for submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including: 1. Building Code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules 5. Environmental protection regulations B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services", prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service complying with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility for which it is responsible. At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary use of permanent facilities: Installer of each permanent service or facility shall assume responsibility for its operation, maintenance and protection during its use as a construction service or facility prior to Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thickness indicated. C. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins. D. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. E. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11-gage, galvanized 2-inch, chain link fabric fencing 6 feet high with galvanized barbed wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I.D. for line posts, and 2-1/2" I.D. for corner posts. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to Architect, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long, with pressure rating greater than maximum pressure of water distribution system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 125 volt AC plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Heating Units: Provide vented temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM or another recognized trade association related to type of fuel being consumed. G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. I. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. J. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 4 TEMPORARY CONTROLS class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended types for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of construction activities. Relocate and modify facilities when required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify when required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of service, provide remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations. 1. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 2. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site, where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 3. Costs and use charges for temporary facilities are responsibility of Contractor. B. Water Service: 1. Provide water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. 2. Where facilities are available on exterior of Owner's existing building, these may be used when of adequate capacity and as coordinated. C. Temporary Electric Power Service: 1. Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics to all areas of construction, and temporary lighting and power for use during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overcurrent protected disconnects switches, automatic ground-fault circuit interrupter devices, and main distribution equipment. a. Arrange with utility company for temporary service. D. Temporary Power Distribution: 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 5 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1. Provide two gang duplex grounded convenience outlets having 3-wire grounded type GFCI receptacles within 75' of outside walls and 150' spacing in any direction within building. Install outlets in such a manner that a 100' extension cord can reach any part of the building, including enclosed areas such as offices. 2. Provide extension cords and ground-fault circuit interrupter equipment or receptacle if required for special equipment. 3. Installers having power requirements other than above shall be responsible for them. Such services include: a. Power to temporary offices, trailers and sheds b. Special power for masonry saws or mixers, floor grinders, floor sanders, etc. c. Heavy duty electrical welding equipment d. Temporary heating units E. Temporary Lighting: 1. When roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. 2. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and safety protection requirements, without operating entire system. Provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. Provide circuit switching in temporary lighting arranged to conserve energy. 3. Provide 120 volt lampholder pigtail socket and guard with 150 watt A-21 lamp at a minimum of one per room or one per 300 sq. ft. of floor space. Generally, in large areas, light stringers shall be installed in rows 20' apart with lights spaced 15' apart on stringers. No more than ten 150 watt A-21 lamps or eight 200 watt A-23 lamps shall be installed on any 20 amp circuit. Provide replacement lamps throughout construction of the Project. a. Limit lighting installations to intensities which will accommodate normal access and workmanship requirements, recognizing that each entity performing work requiring higher intensity lighting will provide supplementary plug-in temporary lighting at localized areas where such work is in progress. 4. Number 12 wire may be used for temporary lighting circuits. F. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout construction period. 3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 1. Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Provide noncombustible construction for offices, shops and sheds located within construction area, or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 6 TEMPORARY CONTROLS C. Temporary Heat, Before Enclosure: 1. Refer to paragraph below for definition of "enclosure". 2. Provide vented temporary heat as required by construction activities. 3. Provide portable heating equipment in accordance with Temporary Heat, After Enclosure. D. Temporary Heat, After Enclosure: 1. Enclosure is defined as that point when construction is sufficiently complete that, with use of temporary enclosures, heat and ventilation can be maintained for installation of finish materials and equipment. 2. Provide temporary heat, and ventilation, (and cooling, when permanent system is available) required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low or high temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. a. Except where use of permanent system is authorized, provide vented, self- contained, LP gas or natural gas heaters with individual space thermostatic control. b. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, salamander type, or blow- thru type heating units is prohibited. 3. Permanent heating, ventilating and cooling systems may be used upon written request and approval by Owner, subject to following requirements: a. Systems shall be completely installed as designed including permanent wiring connections to permanent power sources. Arrange with installer for operation and maintenance of systems including personnel to monitor efficient use. b. Filter material shall be in place over all return air openings, outside air openings and openings where negative pressures are present in duct system. Change filters and filter material when "build-up" of filtered dust affects operation. 4. Maintain a working temperature of not less than 50°F in all parts of the building during working hours, with a minimum of 35°F at all other times unless otherwise required by individual Sections or following paragraphs. This includes all areas where work has been installed which might be subject to damage by freezing. 5. For a period of 7 days prior to interior finishing (painting, resilient tile, ceilings, etc.) and until final acceptance for occupancy by Owner, maintain minimum temperatures of 68°F during working hours and 60°F at all other times. a. Provide and maintain appropriate humidity conditions for installation of woodwork, cabinets, acoustic panels, etc. b. When permanent system is not available for dehumidification purposes, provide air movement, air replacement and higher air temperatures as methods to attain relative humidity requirements. 6. Just prior to Substantial Completion, provide maintenance and repairs required to restore heating, ventilating and cooling systems to "like new" condition, including: 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 7 TEMPORARY CONTROLS a. Cleaning of pipe, ductwork and parts. b. Oiling and greasing of equipment or parts that would normally require same in a periodic maintenance program. c. Replacement of all filters in air systems. This shall be accomplished prior to balancing of systems. d. Replacement of significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions. e. Cleaning of water strainers in heating, cooling and plumbing systems. 7. Provisions of this article shall not in any way change or modify requirements of General Conditions. a. Contractor shall pay all costs, if any, to extend manufacturer's warranty on all items of equipment used for temporary facilities. E. Field Offices: 1. Field office provided by Contractor shall also be the Project Office. It shall be substantially built, well-ventilated, lighted and heated, and comply with applicable codes, for use of all who have official business in connection with this Project. If portable trailers are provided, comply with applicable codes, including tie-downs. 2. Furnish and equip office appropriate for project size and as required for progress meetings. F. Sanitary Facilities: 1. These facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve Project's needs. a. Provide self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit- type privies will not be permitted. b. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used materials. 2. Wash Facilities: Provide for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. Provide safety showers, eye- wash fountains and similar facilities for convenience, safety and sanitation of personnel. G. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: 1. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division-2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations and construction free of water. 2. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner which will not result in flooding project or adjoining property, and not endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 3. Provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed prior to connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 8 TEMPORARY CONTROLS H. Temporary Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary enclosure for protection of construction in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and similar activities. 2. Where heat is needed and permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 3. Install tarpaulins, etc. securely, with non-combustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 square feet or less with plywood or similar materials. 4. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing wood-framed construction. 5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 square feet in area, use UL-labeled fire-retardant treated material for framing and main sheathing. I. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: 1. Provide project identification and other signs of size indicated; install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 2. Project Identification Signs: Construct signs of exterior type, APA, Grade B-B HD overlaid plywood, PS-1, 3/4". Support on posts or framing of treated wood or steel. Engage an experienced sign painter to finish and apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. Provide exterior grade gloss enamel over exterior primer. 3. Temporary Signs: Provide signs which give directional information to construction personnel and visitors. J. Collection and Disposal of Waste: 1. Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner. 2. Burying or burning of waste materials on site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. K. Rodent and Pest Control: 1. Before deep foundation Work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be relatively free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations in a lawful manner using environmentally safe materials. L. Walkways: 1. Provide and maintain temporary walkways around construction work and to field offices, toilets and similar places. Construct walkways of washed, well graded gravel 6" deep by 36" wide, or duckboard units 30" wide with 1 x 6 rough-sawn crossboards on a pair of 3 x 4 runners in 12 foot lengths. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS M. Construction Aids and Miscellaneous Services and Facilities: 1. General: Design, construct, and maintain construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities as needed to accommodate performance of work, including: a. Temporary ladders b. Guardrails and barriers 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Temporary Fire Protection: 1. Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations." 2. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 3. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 4. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas. 5. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. B. Permanent Fire Protection: 1. At earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of permanent fire protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. C. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: 1. Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. D. Enclosure Fence: 1. When excavation begins, install enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Enclose portion of site determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations for construction of new locker room/concession/toilet room building. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by entrance gates. 2. Provide open-mesh, chain-link fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 10 TEMPORARY CONTROLS E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: 1. Provide substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. 2. Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with installation and release of material to minimize opportunity for theft and vandalism. F. Environmental Protection: 1. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. 2. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. G. Utility Protection: 1. Protect existing utility lines and structures indicated or known from damage. a. Locate and flag all lines and structures before beginning excavation and other construction operations. 2. Installer shall protect utility lines constructed for this Project. 3. When utility lines and structures that are to be removed or relocated are encountered within area of operations, notify affected utility in ample time for necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of services. 4. Report damage to existing utility lines or structures immediately to affected utility and to Architect. If determined that repairs are required under the Contract, the cost of such repairs will be administered in accordance with the General Conditions. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Unless Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete, or if necessary restore, permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONSTRUCTION FACILITES AND 01500 - 11 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 2. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 3. Remove temporary paving that is not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that does not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances which might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by governing authority. 4. At Substantial Completion, clean and restore permanent facilities that have been used during construction period. END OF SECTION 01500 13017 ©2013 OMS EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01565 - 1 SECTION 01565 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary erosion and sediment control in accordance with "Rule 5", Storm Water Run-Off Associated With Construction Activity, adopted by the Water Pollution Control Board (327 IAC 15-5) and administered by the Indiana Department of Environmental Management. B. Comply with applicable requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls". C. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 2 concerning earthwork, grading, and seeding. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including: 1. Building Code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules 5. Environmental protection regulations B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." C. Inspections: Allow authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test temporary erosion controls. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials, suitable for use intended. 13017 ©2013 OMS EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01565 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall be the "Operator" of the site, as defined in the Rule. Provide all requirements and pay all fees to comply with "Rule 5", Storm Water Run-Off Associated With Construction Activity adapted by the Water Pollution Control Board (327 IAC 15-5) and administered by the Indiana Department of Environmental Management. 1. In order to facilate the timely start of construction for the Project and without abrogating any of the duties and responsibilities of the Contractor, the Owner has prepared a preliminary plan, and suggested means and methods, for the control of erosion and the collection of sediment from the Project site. 2. The Contractor shall review the plan, means, and methods; modify the plan, means and methods; take appropiate action to comply with current laws and rules pertaining to erosion and sediment control, file the required plan, letter, exhibits, etc., obtain the permit, and pay all fees. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary erosion control facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of construction activities. Relocate and modify facilities when required by construction activities. B. Provide erosion and sediment control ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify when required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. C. Erosion Control: 1. Provide and maintain effective erosion control of areas of cuts and fills whether required by project conditions or by regulatory agencies. Applicable provisions of Division 2 specifying earthwork, grading, and seeding shall govern this work. 2. Additional regulatory agencies which may be affected include: a. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service b. State of Indiana, Stream Pollution Control Board c. State of Indiana, Department of Natural Resources, Division of Water d. County and municipal regulatory agencies 3. Surface drainage from cuts and fills, whether or not completed, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, shall, if turbidity producing materials are present, be held in suitable sedimentation ponds or shall be graded to control erosion within acceptable limits. a. Provide, berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins and similar structures, until permanent drainage and erosion control facilities are completed and operative, if required to meet above standards. b. Keep area of bare soil exposed at any one time to a minimum. c. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate silts or clays on the surface that will erode and contaminate adjacent waterways. 13017 ©2013 OMS EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01565 - 3 D. Utility Protection: 1. Protect existing utility lines and structures indicated or known from damage. a. Locate and flag all lines and structures before beginning construction operations. 2. Protect utility lines constructed for this Project. 3. When utility lines and structures that are to be removed or relocated are encountered within the area of operations, notify affected utility in ample time for necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of services. 4. Report damage to existing utility lines or structures immediately to the affected utility and to the Architect. If determined that repairs are required under the Contract, the cost of such repairs will be administered in accordance with the General Conditions. 3.3 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary erosion facilities. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove temporary erosion control facilities when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent construction, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete, or if necessary restore, permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary erosion and sediment control. 1. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 2. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. 3. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that does not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances which might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. 4. At Substantial Completion, clean and restore permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period. END OF SECTION 01565 13017 ©2013 OMS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products specified. C. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract are included under Section "Product Substitutions." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's and name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. 13017 ©2013 OMS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period. 3. Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. 4. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with products and construction methods of other Contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between Contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, the Architect will determine which products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced. C. Foreign Product Limitations: Refer to the laws of the State of Indiana. D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 13017 ©2013 OMS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified. 6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements. 7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar 13017 ©2013 OMS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 4 phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. a. When the manufacturer's "standard" selections are limited the Architect may also select from the manufacturers "non-standard" selections without any increase in the Contract Amount. Such selections will be limited to colors and patterns, and excludes textures. 8. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division-1 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for processing such selections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 13017 ©2013 OMS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01630 - 1 SECTION 01630 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will not be considered after the award of the Contract, except in extenuating circumstances which are beyond the Contractor's control. 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests on the form "Substitution Request Form", attached to this Section, and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals. 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and 13017 ©2013 OMS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01630 - 2 separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 3. Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 4. "Visual Matching" to an established sample or existing material is not available. (Refer to Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment B. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one separate Contractor, each Contractor shall cooperate with the other Contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and to assure compatibility of products. C. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01630 13017 ©2013 OMS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01630 - 3 CONTRACTOR'S SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Project Name: Improvements to Corporate Athletic Complex Educational Services Center New Parking Lot OMS Project No: 13003/13005 Owner: LaPorte Community School Corporation Architect: Odle McGuire Shook 429 North Pennsylvania Street, Suite 403, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 Contractor: Job No: CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST WITH SUPPORTING DATA: We request your consideration of the substitution of following proposed product instead of the Specified Product: Section No. Paragraph No. Specified Product Proposed Product: [__] Product Data for proposed product is attached, including product description, reference standards, performance and test data. [__] Sample(s) is(are) attached. [__] Sample(s) will be sent if requested by the Architect. Itemized comparison of proposed product with Specified Product: Specified Product Proposed product Name, Brand Catalog No. Manufacturer Significant Qualities Unit cost $ per $ per [__] Material only. [__] Material and installation. Proposed change to the Contract Sum: Credit to the Owner: <$ >. Additional cost to the Owner: $ . The Contract Time: Will be [Increased][Decreased] by calendar days. Describe what effect this substitution will have on the other parts of the Work or on other contracts. 13017 ©2013 OMS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01630 - 4 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION OF CONFORMANCE OF THE SUBSTITUTION OF THIS PROPOSED PRODUCT TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS: We have investigated the substitution of this proposed product and: 1. believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to the Specified Product, except as fully described in the comparison above; 2. will provide the warranty as required by the General Conditions; 3. will provide the special warranty, if any, as specified; 4. have included all cost data and cost implications; 5. will pay redesign and special inspection costs caused by the substitution this proposed product; 6. will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by the substitution of this proposed product; 7. will coordinate the incorporation of the substitution of this proposed product into the Work; 8. will modify, or cause to be modified, other parts of the Work as may be required, or directed, to make all parts of the Work complete; 9. waive future claims for added costs to this Contractor caused by the substitution of this proposed product. Signature Date Name (typed) Phone ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION: [__] Sign Contractor's Statement of Conformance. Resubmit. [__] Provide additional information. Resubmit. [__] Substitution of this proposed product is acceptable with the following conditions: [__] Substitution of this proposed product is not acceptable. [__] A Change Order will be issued to adjust the Contract. Signature Date Name Gerard J. Skibinski, AIA, Project Manager Odle McGuire Shook 13017 ©2013 OMS STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 SECTION 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting of systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. 1.3 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring, controls, and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of Contractor's personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01452 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. I. The Contractor job superintendent shall not be removed from the job until all equipment has been put in operating order, tested, demonstrated to the Owner and the punchlist completed. 1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operations and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel at least two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment locations. 13017 ©2013 OMS STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. F. Video Record Demonstrations, including questions and answers. Provide Owner with copy of video in DVD format. 1.5 INSTRUCTIONAL VIDEO RECORDINGS A. Provide instructional video tapes or DVD format as required elsewhere. B. Provide a video recording for each mechanical and electrical system including but not limited to air handling units, chillers, fan coil units, and temperature control system. C. Video recording shall include demonstrations of all items listed in Article 1.4, Paragraph D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01650 13017 ©2013 OMS FIELD ENGINEERING 01722 - 1 SECTION 01722 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services including: 1. Land survey work. 2. Civil engineering services. B. Procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities are specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination". C. Submitting Project record surveys is specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer certifying the location and elevation of improvements. B. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located to perform required land surveying services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Identification: The Owner has identified existing control points and property line corner stakes on the site survey. B. The Contractor shall verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 13017 ©2013 OMS FIELD ENGINEERING 01722 - 2 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. Permanent project benchmarks are to be established by a professional land surveyor. D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas piping, and water service piping. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. 2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field engineering services, the Contractor shall prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. C. Site Improvements: The Contractor shall locate and lay out all site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: The Contractor shall locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical W ork. Initial building control points are to be laid out by a registered land surveyor. E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 01722 13017 ©2013 OMS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01732 - 1 SECTION 01732 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities are specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination". C. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal: 1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed; indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. List products to be used and installers that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations to show how reinforcement is integrated with the original structure. 7. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect right to later require complete removal and replacement of the Work found to be unsatisfactory. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching any structural elements B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching any operating elements or safety related systems, including: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 13017 ©2013 OMS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01732 - 2 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 4. Membranes and flashings. 5. Fire protection systems. 6. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. 7. Control systems. 8. Communication systems. 9. Electrical wiring systems. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1. If possible retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work. If it is not possible to engage the original installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized installer or fabricator acceptable to the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. B. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 13017 ©2013 OMS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01732 - 3 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. 1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or diamond core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division-2 where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 4. Patch, repair or reinstall existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01732 13017 ©2013 OMS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01770 - 1 SECTION 01770 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following and for each separate project. 1. Inspection procedures 2. Project record document submittal 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal 4. Submittal of warranties 5. Final cleaning B. Additional closeout requirements for specific construction activities may be included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Submit record documents, including drawings, specifications, product data, samples, maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Architect 13017 ©2013 OMS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01770 - 2 will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon finding the Work complete, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01770 - 3 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. 5. Upon completion of the Work submit Record Drawings to the Architect for the Owner’s records. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. E. Record Samples: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet with the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner's instructions regarding delivery to the Owner's Sample storage area. F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. G. Maintenance Manuals: Provide 2 complete sets of maintenance manuals. Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions 2. Spare parts list 3. Copies of warranties 4. Wiring diagrams 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles 6. Inspection procedures 7. Fixture lamping schedule 8. List of subcontractors and suppliers including telephone numbers 9. Shop Drawings and Product Data 10. Similar maintenance information helpful to the Owner 1.6 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL PAYMENT A. General: Prior to requesting Architect/Engineer final observation for certification of final payment, complete the following: 1. Refer to Article 9.10 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01770 - 4 2. Submit final payment request. 3. Submit copy of Architect/Engineer final Completion List of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. This copy is to be signed by the Contractor. 4. Submit certification stating that no materials containing asbestos were incorporated into the Work. 5. Contractor shall submit certification stating that no flux or solder used for drinking water piping contained more than 0.2 percent lead, and that no pipe or fittings used for drinking water piping contained more than 8.0 percent lead nor for it to exceed any State of National established levels of acceptance." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals 2. Record documents 3. Spare parts and materials 4. Tools 5. Lubricants 6. Fuels 7. Identification systems 8. Control sequences 9. Hazards 10. Cleaning 11. Warranties and bonds 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Startup 2. Shutdown 3. Emergency operations 4. Noise and vibration adjustments 5. Safety procedures 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments 7. Effective energy utilization 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01770 - 5 a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. 3.3 PUNCHLIST A. Prior to the Architect's preparation of a Project Completion List, Contractor shall prepare his punchlist and submit a copy of same to the Architect. Contractor shall keep his own punchlist on the job for use by his employees and subcontractors to facilitate completion of the Work. B. The Contractor's inspection shall be as thorough as possible, in accordance with his desire to provide first-class workmanship and maintain good reputation; and shall include Work under his Contract, including that of his subcontractors. C. The Architect shall observe the Work, providing Work on the Contractor's punchlist has been completed, and prepare the Project Completion List for use by the Contractor and his subcontractors to expedite proper completion of the Work. END OF SECTION 01770 13017 ©2013 OMS WARRANTIES 01787 - 1 SECTION 01787 - WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, for each project, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 13017 ©2013 OMS WARRANTIES 01787 - 2 E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. C. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS”, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01787 13017 ©2013 OMS TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for termite control: 1. Soil treatment 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency B. PCO: Pest control operator 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 1. Date and time of application 2. Moisture content of soil before application 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used 6. Areas of application 7. Water source for application E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. 13017 ©2013 OMS TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA- Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin 13017 ©2013 OMS TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 3 2. American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department 3. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care 4. DowElanco 5. FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties 6. Zeneca Professional Products PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials 13017 ©2013 OMS TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 4 before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA- Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units 2. Face brick 3. Cast stone 4. Mortar and grout 5. Reinforcing steel 6. Masonry joint reinforcement 7. Ties and anchors 8. Embedded flashing 9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories 10. Cavity-wall insulation 11. Fire department key lock box B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at tops of masonry walls and at openings in masonry walls. C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications". 2. Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry from net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types according to Table 2105.2.2.1.2 of the International Building Code. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: f'm = 1500 psi. 2. For Brick Unit Masonry: f'm = 8000 psi. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2 B. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. a. Include size variation data for brick verifying that actual range of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C 216 dimension tolerances. 2. Provide quantity required to erect mock-up panel. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with International Building Code as amended by the Indiana Building Code, latest edition. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. 1. If a single color brick is selected and quantity required exceeds capacity of a single production "run" or "lot", manufacturer shall mix units at plant in proportion to quantities of run or lot. D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. E. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing: 1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each clay masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per International Code Table 2103.7(2) (ASTM C 270). 4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per International Code Table 2103.7(2) (ASTM C 1019). F. Mockups: Before installing unit masonry, build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup. a. Typical exterior masonry-veneer wall complete with metal studs, sheathing, air infiltration barrier, veneer ties, flashing, and weep holes. 2. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 1. Protect concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Option: Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. 3. Unprotected masonry construction may be cause for rejection of all or part of construction which was unprotected. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 4 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Hot Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and above. Provide the following requirements when appropriate or when directed. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees F, protect masonry work and materials. 2. Store materials in a cool, shaded location. Cover aggregate stockpiles with plastic sheeting to retard evaporation of moisture. Keep top of pile moist. Lightly spraying of stored materials with water will cool materials. 3. High suction brick may need to be wetted. Addition of mixing water may be needed. 4. Cooling of mixing water with ice may be required. Do not use water from long hoses where water temperature will cause "flashing" of mortar. 5. Adjustment of mix may require addition of cement, lime, set-retarding or water- reducing admixtures. Only adjustments which have been tested in advance in accordance with ASTM C 780 and ASTM C 1019 will be considered. Substitution of Type III cement for Type I cement in exposed mortar joints will not be acceptable because of color change characteristics. 6. Provide sun shades, wind screens, water fog sprays, and moisture retaining covers to reduce effects of dry, windy weather. 7. Reduce lead time for mixing mortar and store mixed mortar in cool, shady location. 8. Do not spread mortar more than 4 feet ahead of masonry and set units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. 9. As soon as joints are tooled, fog spray masonry with water and keep moist for 24 hours to provide for curing of mortar and to prevent "dry-outs". 10. Schedule work to avoid hottest part of day. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes as required by conditions. B. Concrete Masonry Units: UBC Standard 21-4 (ASTM C 90) and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight; use for walls below grade, exposed exterior walls, and where indicated. 3. Solid Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units: Same as specified above except 100% solid, no void, unless otherwise indicated. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5 4. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 5. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 4 inches nominal; 3-5/8 inches actual. b. 6 inches nominal; 5-5/8 inches actual. c. 8 inches nominal; 7-5/8 inches actual. d. 10 inches nominal; 9-5/8 inches actual. e. 12 inches nominal; 11-5/8 inches actual. f. 14 inches nominal; 13-5/8 inches actual. 6. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire-resistive units, non-fire-resistive units, and precast lintel units which match in color and texture. a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. 2.3 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. C. Face Brick: International Building Code Table 2105.2.2.1.1 ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 5500 psi. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced" or Anone@. 4. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. 5. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions: a. Modular: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-1/2 to 7-5/8 inches long. 6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Color and Texture: a. Belden Brick Company, Modular Commodore Velour. 2.4 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 6 B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as needed to produce required textures. D. Fine Aggregates: Manufactured or natural sands complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as needed to produce required textures. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by the manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures used. 1. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 5 to 7 percent. F. Dowels, Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1.5 CAST STONE UNITS A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. B. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy- coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of material. C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements D. Cure and finish units as follows: 1. Cure units in totally enclosed curing room under dense fog and water spray at 95 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. 2. Yard cure units until the sum of the mean daily temperatures for each day equals or exceeds 350 deg F. 3. Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces indicated to be finished. E. Colors and Textures: Arriscraft International; Color: Magnolia. 1. Water Table Texture: Smooth. 2. Field Texture: Rocked. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 7 B. Hydrated Lime: UBC Standard 21-13 (ASTM C 207), Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. Mortar Cement: International Building Code Table 2103.7(1) (ASTM C 1329). E. Masonry Cement: Not permitted on this Project. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Potable. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Mortar Cement: a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement. b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation. 2.7 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 2.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: 1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. B. For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. (D/A 320) C. For “cavity” multi-wythe masonry, provide types as follows: 1. Adjustable (2-piece) type with single pair of side rods and cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. and with separate adjustable veneer ties engaging the cross ties. Cross ties are either U-shaped with eyes or rectangular. Space side rods for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and size adjustable ties to extend at least halfway through outer wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. (D/A I.L.E. Ladur-Eye, D/A 360 Ladur-Eye) or (Adjustable CRT) D. For “composite” multi-wythe masonry, provide types as follows: 1. Ladder type with cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. and 1 side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in width, plus 1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint reinforcement by one of the following: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. (Model Numbers (D/A ###) are for reference only.) 2. AA Wire Products Co. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 8 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 2.9 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. C. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot- dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153. D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2.10 BENT WIRE TIES A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Where coursing between wythes does not align, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches. (D/A 515) 2. Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches. (D/A 515) B. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2.11 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: 1. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs to bridge insulation or sheathing and contact studs; and raised rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie. (X-Seal Anchor; H&B) a. Plate 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long with strap 5/8 inch wide by 6 inches long; slot clearance formed between face of plate and back of strap shall not exceed diameter of wire tie by more than 1/32 inch. b. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and to prevent moisture from penetrating sheathing at pronged legs and screw holes.” 2. Wire Tie Section: Triangular or rectangular shaped wire tie sized to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 3. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from not less than 0.0677-inch-thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 4. Fabricate wire tie sections from 0.1875-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 9 C. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following corrosion protective coating: 1. Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Organic-Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws: a. Drill-Flex; Elco Industries, Inc. b. Traxx; ITW-Buildex.” 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Headed bolts with large washers on the head and standard washer on the nut end. D. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Chemical anchors, expansion anchors or undercut anchors as required. 2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 3. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors. 4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed. 2.13 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS (Through-wall) A. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and below: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. 2. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to suit wall conditions. 3. Fabricate metal drip edges from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 2 inch out from wall, with a hemmed outer edge bent down 30 degrees. B. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 5-oz./sq. ft. sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of 5- oz./sq. ft. sheet copper coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 10 D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Metal Flashing: a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. York Manufacturing, Inc. c. Shop fabricated in accordance with requirements of Division 7. 2. Copper-Laminated Flashing: a. Copper Fabric Flashing; Advanced Building Products, Inc. b. Copper Fabric; AFCO Products, Inc. c. H & B C-Fab Flashing; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper; Phoenix Building Products. e. Copper Fabric Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. f. York Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: a. Cop-R-Cote; Advanced Building Products, Inc. b. Cop-A-Cote; AFCO Products, Inc. c. H & B C-Coat Flashing; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated; Phoenix Building Products. e. Coated Copper Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. f. Coated Copper Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. g. Copperseal; York Manufacturing, Inc. 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. (D/A 2010) B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. (D/A 2001) 1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes. E. Cavity Drainage Material: 3/4-inch-thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 11 1. Cavity Drainage Material: a. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc. b. CavClear Masonry Mat; CavClear. c. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd. d. Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. 2. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: a. D/A 811; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. D/A 816; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c. No. 376 Rebar Positioner; Heckman Building Products, Inc. d. #RB Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. e. #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. f. Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. g. O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. H. Isolation Board: 1/4 inch thick corrugated box board or extruded polystyrene "protection board". I. Cementitious Waterproofing for Cast Stone: 1. "Thoroseal"; Thoro System Products J. Fire Department Key Lock Box: Provide a metal fire department key lock box with special access latch concealed by a hinged door. Locate where indicated. 1. Recess mounting: Heavy duty, 5" high by 4" wide by 3-1/4" deep box with 7" by 7" flange. Color: Aluminum. a. Model 3200R; The Knox Company, Irvine, CA; 800-552-5669 2. Authorization: Obtain signature of local fire department on manufacturer’s Authorization/Order Form before ordering the lock box. 3. Coordinate installation of contact switch for building security alarm provided in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. 2.15 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin; formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for adhering insulation to backup masonry. 2.16 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal.of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 12 a. Cleaners for Red and Light-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining with Mortar Not Subject to Bleaching: 1) 202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2) Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc. b. Cleaners for Brick Subject to Metallic Staining: 1) 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2) Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc. 2.17 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Option: Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with UBC Standard 21-15 (ASTM C 270), Property Specification. 1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime or mortar cement. 3. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type M. 4. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. 5. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S. 6. For brick veneer, use Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with UBC Standard 21-19 (ASTM C 476). 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with UBC Table 21-C for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections, sleeves, blocking, anchor bolts, electrical boxes, and similar items. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 13 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard (UBC) and requirements applicable to each type of installation included in Project. B. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. Place masonry walls in center of nominal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. C. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. D. Grout cores of CMU full, consolidate, and screed smooth to provide full bearing for steel stud runner, for wood stud plates, for brick veneer, for coping, and for similar conditions or provide solid CMU, or provide bond beam filled with grout, or provide a solid cap block; to ensure full bearing and anchorage for construction above. E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After equipment is installed, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. F. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. G. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. H. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. 1. Field test: Draw a circle the size of a quarter on a brick and place 20 drops of water in the circle. If the water is absorbed within 1.5 minutes, the brick requires wetting. I. Wetting of Cast Stone: Drench cast stone units with clean water before laying. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. For conspicuous vertical lines and surfaces, such as columns, walls, arises, external corners, door jambs, reveals, expansion joints, and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. B. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 1. Field Test: A plumb line from top of wall shall fall within vertical joints. C. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit. D. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 14 E. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. F. For collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch. G. For position of linear building lines shown on drawings and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch. H. For dimensions of cross section of columns and thickness of walls from dimensions shown, do not exceed minimum 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch. I. Align masonry within 1/8 inch of adjoining faces and in alignment of matching profiles of other work. Tolerances are not accumulative and shall coordinate with tolerances of other work. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Brick: One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: Running bond. 3. Cast Stone: As indicated on Drawings. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rake back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. 1. Do not “tooth” masonry work. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Repair penetrations of the exterior wall weather-tight and water-tight, including hose bibbs, pipe sleeves, and similar work. F. Surround concealed steel framing, or portions which are concealed, with isolation board and fill space between isolation board and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with grout, unless otherwise indicated. H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, “Duro-O-Stop”, or similar material in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 15 I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under and not less than one core each side of bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. Lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions and droppings into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick, bringing excess mortar to outside of the wall. Mortar droppings in the cavity are not acceptable and will be cause for rejection of the wall veneer work. C. Set cast stone trim units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting; for soiled stone surfaces, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 1. Where stone units are at or below grade, waterproof surface below grade, bed, entire cavity side, and backside, with cementitious waterproofing ("Thoroseal"). D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Point with mortar and tool scored CMU units, and scored precast lintels, to match adjacent mortar joints. 2. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width. E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY A. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together. 1. Bond CMU foundation walls with truss type joint reinforcement at each horizontal joint, 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Provide a wire for each face shell. B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L" units as well as masonry bonding. C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 16 1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units. 3.7 CAVITIES (Exterior masonry veneer over masonry and/or sheathed stud framing back-up) A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. B. Tie exterior wythe to backup with horizontal joint reinforcement consisting of eye and pintle metal ties at 1'- 4" o.c. horizontally and 1'- 4" o.c. vertically. Install eye in exterior plane of insulation, so pintle will hold insulation in place. C. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches on center both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. This reinforcement is in addition to continuous joint reinforcement. 4. Comply with minimum requirements indicated in Dur-O-Wal Technical Bulletin 92-1, "Joint Reinforcement/Connector Detailing and Selection Guide", including "foundation walls". B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing, concrete and masonry backup with masonry- veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with two metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around the perimeter. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 17 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated, but not more distant than recommended by BIA, for the conditions indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. 1. Install control and expansion joints in brick veneer masonry no greater than 24 feet apart with an aspect ratio not greater than 2:1 in any direction, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Architect in writing. Locate joints within 6 feet of outside corners and at intersection of inside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Layout, install and comply with BIA requirements/recommendations for expansion joint locations. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Build in joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and clear of mortar. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick- size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, compressive strength, weight, and joints to match coursing, with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Place identical bars in top and bottom of each lintel. Cure precast lintels by the same method used for concrete masonry units. 2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fill two cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (2'-0") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items. 2. If a control joint occurs at end of a lintel, provide a bond breaker on top of a smooth bearing area. Smooth bearing area by first plastering with mortar to fill pores in CMU, trowel to remove excess mortar, when cured rub with carborundum stone until smooth. Place mortar on top of bond breaker and continue work. Rake mortar and prepare joint for sealant. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 18 A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At multi-wythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier. Tape termination water tight. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 4. At expansion and control joints, interrupt flashing at each side of joint and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 5. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. 6. Overlap end joints of sheet metal flashing receivers not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer and seal lap with non-curing butyl sealant. Do not cover flashing receiver unless installation is acceptable to this Installer. Place through wall flashing on top of the sheet metal receiver on sloping bed of mortar. Apply additional mortar on top of through wall flashing and continue the work. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded, thru-wall, flashing and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. Install from exterior face of wall to not less than one foot above bed and mechanically attach to backup. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. 3. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. 3.13 FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY LOCK BOX A. Install fire department lock box where indicated in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions 3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 19 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of Section 2104.5 of the Uniform Building Code. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 2104.6 of the Uniform Building Code for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Do not exceed following pour heights for fine grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches, pour height of 12 inches. b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches in height. c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 24 feet. 3. Do not exceed following pour heights for coarse grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 inches. b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches. c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches, pour height of 24 feet. 4. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height. a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. b. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches on center. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A qualified independent testing agency will be employed in accordance with requirements of Division 1 Section @Quality Control Services@, to perform following testing for field quality control. 1. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft.of wall area or portion thereof. C. Mortar properties will be tested per UBC Standard 21-16 (ASTM C 780). D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per UBC Standard 21-18 (ASTM C 1019). E. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67. 13017 ©2013 OMS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 20 F. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. 3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 1. Voids in head joints of brick veneer masonry, hair line cracks at interface of masonry unit and mortar joints, voids in grouting process of reinforced masonry and similar deficiencies are not acceptable and shall be removed and restored to acceptable condition prior to Substantial Completion or prior to certification of next Payment Request if condition is considered by Architect to require correction before subsequent work can continue. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution. a. Job-mixed detergent solution, or, b. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in strict compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 1) If joints are "burned" by cleaning process, cut out joints 1/2 inch deep, and point to match existing. Clean as specified; follow manufacturer's instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 13017 ©2013 OMS MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1 SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, blocking, and any other wood items required to complete this work. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. C. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant- treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior for wood exposed to weather. B. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. 13017 ©2013 OMS MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 2 B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade in compliance with WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade in compliance with WWPA of any species. 2.4 WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS A. Structural-Use Panel Standards: Provide either all-veneer, mat-formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood," where plywood is indicated. B. Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 1. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." C. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: C-D Exposure 1, thickness as indicated or if not indicated, not less than 3/4 inch. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. 13017 ©2013 OMS MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3 D. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Cut and shape to required size. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wood Grounds (Screeds), and Nailers (Sleepers): Provide continuous wood units for anchorage and securement of all materials, equipment, fixtures, and similar elements to vertical and horizontal surfaces. In all cases secure grounds and nailers with nails, fasteners, anchors, screws or bolts, at required spacing, and in a manner which will develop structural resistance required to support materials, equipment, fixtures, and similar elements requiring grounds and nailers. 1. Roof decks, fascia, and copings: Provide anchorage and securement to resist 90 lbf/sq. ft. up-lift. Thickness of nailers: not less than thickness of insulation, unless otherwise indicated. D. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 06105 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim (Alternate) 2. Interior frames and jambs (Alternate) 3. Plastic-laminate cabinets 4. Plastic-laminate countertops 5. Solid surface material countertops (Alternate) 6. Solid surface material window stools (Base Bid) 7. Shop finishing interior woodwork B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 2. Plastic laminates 3. Solid surface material D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in.[5 inches wide by 24 inches long], for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished woodwork. 3. Wood-veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches [12 by 24 inches], for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in.for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with [2 of] exposed surface finished. 5. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 6. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 7. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by an active member of AWI. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Northern Maple, Select White, Grade 1 per AWI Section 100; plain sliced, AA grade for veneer. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. 6. Kerfed Particleboard: 1/2" thick kerfed particleboard core with 0.080 thick poplar plywood face applied to core with contact adhesive with latex-impregnated face paper. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates indicated. E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin without a precoated finish complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, and ANSI Z124.6. 1. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Schedule. F. Clear Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Hardware Standard: Provide specified hardware items as follows: C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521 D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, [4 inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter, 2-1/2 inches deep. E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. G. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads: 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf 2. File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett and Co., Inc. K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed- steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide AWI Premium grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16”. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Premium. C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. E. Wood Species and Cut: Northern Maple, Select White, Grade I per AWI Section 100. 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Premium. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 3. Edges: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Refer to Millwork Details on Drawings and Old National Bank Millwork Standards. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections as indicated on Drawings. G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom. Premium C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide Architect's selections as indicated on Drawings. D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. F. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. 2.9 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS (ALTERNATE) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops. B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. Color as indicated on Drawings. 2. Finish Sheen: Semi-gloss D. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2.10 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL WINDOW STOOLS (BASE BID) A. Quality Standard: Provide joinery in compliance with AWI Section 300 requirements for standing and running trim. B. Grade: Custom C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. Color: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Finish Sheen: Semi-gloss E. Fabricate stools in one piece with eased edges and corners, unless otherwise indicated. 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8 Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2.11 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900. B. Grade: Premium C. Wood Species and Cut: Northern Maple, Select White, Grade I per AWI Section 100. 2.12 SHOP FINISHING A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end- grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay. D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System TR-5: Catalyzed vinyl lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. a. Apply vinyl wash coat sealer after staining and before filling. 6. Sheen: As approved by samples during submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 9 B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than [36 inches] [60 inches] [96 inches] long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. [Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.] 1. Fill gaps, if any, between wood trim and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section 13017 ©2013 OMS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 10 "Joint Sealants"; color: clear. 4. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 13017 ©2013 OMS BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING 07215 - 1 SECTION 07215 - BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter and under slab-on-grade insulation 2. Concealed building insulation 3. Glass-mat gypsum sheathing board. 4. Air infiltration barrier. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound attenuation insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall and partition assemblies, thermal insulation for furred walls, and vapor retarder for exterior walls and soffits. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency indicating compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 13017 ©2013 OMS BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING 07215 - 2 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the following: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Dow Chemical Co. b. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation d. Schuller International, Inc. C. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below: 1. Type VI, 1.80-lb/cu. ft. minimum density; 25 lbf/sq.in. compressive resistance. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. D. Foil-faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 with 0.5 perm- rated reflective aluminum foil facing. 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 450, respectively. 2.2 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 13017 ©2013 OMS BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING 07215 - 3 1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper-coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inches in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: a. TACTOO Insul-Hangers; AGM Industries, Inc. b. Spindle Type Gemco Hangers; Gemco. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: a. RC150; AGM Industries, Inc. b. SC150; AGM Industries, Inc. c. Dome-Cap; Gemco. d. R-150; Gemco. e. S-150; Gemco. 2.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 2. Size: 48 by 96 inches, 48 by 108 inches, or 48 by 120 inches. 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Dens-Glass Gold" by Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. “Glas-Roc Brand High Performance Exterior Sheathing” by Certainteed. 2.5 SHEATHING ACCESSORIES A. Air-Infiltration Barrier: Proprietary building wrap with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Provide one of the following products: 1. Polyethylene sheet; 0.0038 to 0.0064 inch thick; formed by spinning continuous strands of fine, high-density-polyethylene interconnected fibers and bonding them together by heat and pressure; incorporating an additive to provide ultraviolet light resistance for up to 120 days; and with a water-vapor transmission rate equaling 535 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Method A). a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Tyvek Housewrap" by DuPont Company. B. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, ASTM C 954, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other 13017 ©2013 OMS BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING 07215 - 4 corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations, including removing projections that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set extruded-polystyrene board insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. On horizontal surfaces, under concrete slab-on-grade, set extruded-polystyrene board insulation units flat, level, and in plane, with tightly fitted joints. C. Protect insulation from damage during backfilling, concrete placement and similar situations. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 13017 ©2013 OMS BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING 07215 - 5 B. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Where height of cavities exceed 10 feet, provide faced blanket insulation and hold blankets in place with spindle-type anchors and retaining washers. C. Stuff mineral-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 1. Fill voids and cavity spaces around door and window frames and similar penetrations. Foamed-in-place polyisocyanurate insulation may be used for filling these voids; do not over-foam confined spaces. 2. At walls to deck, fill voids between wall, building structure, and roof structure to effectively seal and prevent the passage of smoke. Comply with Code requirements for fire-rated wall conditions and provide proper firestopping materials, specified in another Division 7 Section, for wall rating indicated. D. Provide a complete and continuous insulation thermal barrier for the entire building envelope, including exterior walls, soffits, and all similar areas; provide additional insulation where indicated. 3.6 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting construction, except provide a 3/8-inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly. D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Vertical Installation: Install 48-inch wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. Provide additional blocking or backing at horizontal joints. G. Air-Infiltration Barrier Application: Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier as follows: 1. Cut back air-infiltration barrier 1/2 inch on each side of break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 13017 ©2013 OMS BUILDING INSULATION AND EXTERIOR SHEATHING 07215 - 6 2. Apply proprietary building wrap to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover vertical flashing with 4-inch overlap. H. Sealing Sheathing Joints: Seal joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written recommendations and as follows: 1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed sealant in entire face of tape. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.7 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07215 EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 1 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) with Air Moisture Barrier application on gypsum sheathing. 2. Moulded decorative brackets and dentils. B. Steel stud framing and gypsum sheathing behind system are specified in Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing". C. Requirements specified by reference in this Section for sealing joints in system with elastomeric joint sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of an inner layer of board insulation and an outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly to board insulation and a textured protective finish coat. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated. B. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by the EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA). C. System in this Section refers to Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems. D. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Standard: This section specifies requirements of EIFS assemblies based on the specific system indicated. Other listed manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in system performance and materials are minor nor less than specified. 1. EIFS: Sto Corp.; StoTherm Essence NExT System with StoGuard air moisture barrier system. 2. Decorative Brackets: Spectis Moulders Inc., BL 2456; 14-1/4” projection, 30” height, 7- 1/2” width. 3. Decorative Dentils: Spectis Moulders Inc., DTB6X6X9.25 B. General: Provide systems that comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. 2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish. EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 2 C. Physical Properties of EIFS Class PB: Provide exterior insulation and finish systems whose physical properties and structural performance comply with the following requirements when tested per methods referenced. 1. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2,000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 153. 2. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. 3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 154 4. Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components when viewed under 5 times magnification after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. 5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch (50.8-by-50.8-mm) clean glass substrate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274. 6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC- ES AC219. 7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per EIMA 101.03. 8. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa) of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02. 9. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247. 10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219. 11. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS when constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following: a. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb (10.2 to 17 J). 12. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC-ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330. 13. Negative Wind Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm) in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system, shows capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each component of exterior insulation and finish systems specified. B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and construction penetrating it, and attachments to construction behind system. EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 3 C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts and small-scale samples consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of textural choices indicated. 1. Submit sealant manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available. D. Samples for verification in the form of 24-inch- (600-mm-) square panels for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work. 1. Incorporate within each sample a typical control joint filled with sealant of color indicated or selected. E. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of exterior insulation and finish systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. H. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants; include joint sealant manufacturers' interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. I. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence system's compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record, of not less than 10 years, of successful in-service performance, and who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record, of not less than 15 years, of successful in-service performance. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 4 D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from one source and by a single manufacturer or by manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components. E. Mockup: Prior to installing system, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Protect mockups from weather and from construction activities. Brace to resist design wind loads and provide waterproof coverings for construction materials not intended to be permanently exposed to the weather. b. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact. B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4 deg C) during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for not less than 24 hours after installation. B. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of EIFS materials. 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of system with related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 5 protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PB system by one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Senergy, Inc. 3. Sto Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer. B. Colors and Textures of Finish Coat: Provide one of the following: 1. Senergy: Color – #410 Snow; Texture – Fine 2. Sto: Color – #6050 White Linen; Texture – Fine 3. Dryvit: Color - #522 Lite Gray; Texture – Sandblast DPR C. Air Moisture Barrier: System manufacturer’s standard secondary moisture protection coating. 1. Air Barrier Joint Compound: One-component acrylic based flexible joint compound for rough opening protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing.. 2. Air Barrier Waterproof Coating: One component acrylic based waterproof coating for wall sheathing. D. Primer-Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. E. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use, compatible with substrate, and complying with the following requirements: 1. One-component, polymer-modified, cement based high build adhesive formulation for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrate of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. . 2. Provide formulation required for spray equipment, if required, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. 3. Provide formulation required for decorative brackets and dentils as recommended by moulding manufacturer. F. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 6 1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. 2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397. G. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with tensile strength of not less than 120 lb (21 dN/cm) and per ASTM E 2098, complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight: 1. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m). 2. Intermediate Reinforcing Mesh: 10 oz./sq. yd. (322 g/sq. m). 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m). 4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m). 5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: 7.2 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m). H. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert fillers to which only water is added at the job site. I. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. J. Water: Clean and potable. K. Mechanical Fastener Assemblies: System manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fastener assemblies, consisting of thermal cap, system manufacturer's standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated, capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board, and of the following description: 1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954. L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's requirements, manufactured from vinyl plastic and complying with ASTM C 1063. 1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated 1-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and thickness of insulation as well, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating. 2. Drip Screed: Prefabricated 1-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and thickness of insulation as well, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and extended to form a drip. 2.3 MOULDED DECORATIVE BRACKETS AND DENTILS A. Moulded Details: Provide polyurethane moulded decorative brackets and dentils as specified in the Design Standards or approved equal. EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 7 2.4 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Sealant Products: Provide system manufacturer's recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials and complies with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below. 1. Low modulus silicone sealant. B. Sealant Color: Comply with the following requirement: 1. Provide Architect's selections from sealant manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 2.5 MIXING A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry and comply with EIFS manufacturer’s requirements for moisture content of substrate. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work. B. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with system manufacturer's requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 1. Apply primer-sealer over substrates where required by system manufacturer for improving adhesion. 3.3 AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 8 A. Comply with manufacturer's current published instructions for installation of air barrier over specified sheathing. B. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. D. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. E. Apply air barrier joint compound by trowel over rough openings, sheathing joints, inside and outside corners, and similar features; immediately embed reinforcing mesh in the wet joint compound and trowel smooth. 1. Embed minimum 4-inch wide mesh at sheathing joints. 2. Embed minimum 8-inch wide mesh at rough openings, inside and outside corners, and similar features. 3. Spot fasteners in sheathing with air barrier joint compound. F. Apply air barrier waterproof coating by roller over sheathing surface, including the dry joint compound, to a uniform wet mil thickness of 10 mils in one coat. Use 3/4-inch nap roller. Protect from weather until dry. G. Coordinate installation of connecting air barrier components with other trades to provide a continuous air tight membrane. H. Coordinate installation of flashing and other moisture protection components with other trades to achieve complete moisture protection such that water is directed to the exterior, not into the wall assembly, and drained to the exterior at sources of leaks (windows, doors, and similar penetrations through the wall assembly). 3.4 EIFS INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Apply trim accessories at perimeter of system, at expansion joints, and elsewhere, as indicated. Use drip screed at bottom edge of system unless otherwise indicated. Use casing beads at other locations where required. C. Adhesively attach insulation to comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply adhesive to insulation by the notched trowel method in a manner that results in adhesive coating the entire surface of gypsum sheathing once insulation is adhered to the sheathing, unless system manufacturer's instructions specify the use of primer-sealer in combination with the ribbon and dab method. a. Apply ribbons of adhesive so that when insulation boards are placed on the wall, the ribbons will be vertical. 2. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, prior to beginning rasping and sanding insulation or application of base coat and reinforcing fabric. 3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally. Begin first course from drip screed and work upward. Work from EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 9 perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels when possible. Apply a thin coat of adhesive to edges of insulation before inserting into trim accessories. 4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so that no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints at least 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door openings. a. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches (100 mm) from joints in sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches (100 mm) from reveals. 5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without use of adhesive. 7. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated. 8. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 9. Cut grooves, rabbets, and other features in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that conform accurately to profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). 10. Install decorative mouldings at locations as indicated on the Drawings; comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for installation and preparation for EIFS finish coating. 11. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind exterior insulation and finish systems. 12. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges as well as between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat. 13. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulating with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat, unless otherwise indicated. 14. Treat edges of insulation board at trim accessories by extending base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. 15. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. D. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system manufacturer. E. Embed reinforcing mesh of type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous or lapped at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer's requirements. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base coat material if necessary, so that reinforcing mesh pattern is not visible. 1. Intermediate reinforcing fabric. F. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 8 by 16 inch (200 by 400 mm) strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip reinforcing at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped at least 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of corners. 1. At decorative grooves (false joints), apply strip reinforcing at least 8 inches (200 mm) wide. EXTERIOR INSULATION 13017 ©2013 OMS AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 10 2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. G. Double Layer Application: Apply a second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh of weight indicated below, in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. 1. Standard reinforcing fabric. H. Double Base Coat Application: Apply a second base coat in same manner as first application, except without reinforcing fabric. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. I. Apply finish coat over dry base coat in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved sample. 1. Apply finish coat over moulded decorative brackets and dentils. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and with EIMA "Joint Sealant Specifications for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Class PB and PM." 1. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and system manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 3. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. 4. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints without disturbing joint seal. 5. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive system coatings. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer and system manufacturer that ensures system's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07241 13017 ©2013 OMS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gutters and downspouts (rain drainage). 2. Sheet metal flashing at various roof conditions. 3. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. B. Through wall flashing and other integral masonry flashing is specified in Division 4. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. B. Fabricate and install flashing to comply with recommendations of ASCE 7-95 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" for the following: 1. Classification of Building: Category III 2. Exposure of Building: Category C 3. Minimum Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph 4. Wind Pressures: Not less than 30 psf; System 2 5. Seismic Zone: 2A 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. If Installer is not the fabricator (manufacturer), submit installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. B. Shop drawings showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details, including gutters, downspouts, and miscellaneous fabrications. Provide layouts at 1/4"= 1'-0" scale and details at 3"= 1'-0" scale or larger. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. 13017 ©2013 OMS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: 1. Factory Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, unless otherwise indicated. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, except where harder temper is required for forming or performance; minimum 0.0187 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES: A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened or 302/304 stainless steel. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. B. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. C. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." D. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2 part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior or interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints. E. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof and weather resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. F. Paper Slip Sheet: 5 lb. rosin sized building paper. G. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397; Minimum 6 mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. I. Gutter and Conductor Head Guards: 20 gage galvanized or nonmagnetic stainless steel mesh or fabricated units, with selvaged edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Select materials for compatibility with gutters and downspouts. J. Gutter Joint Tape: 6 inch wide tape of 45 mil EPDM sheet. K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. 13017 ©2013 OMS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Fabricate counter flashing systems similar to SMACNA Fig. 4-3C, unless otherwise indicated. D. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. F. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. H. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. I. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2. Provide continuous cleats for copings, fascia, fascia cap, and similar items on the outside or facade side of the building. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. 1. Fabricate work from not less than the following thicknesses: a. Flashing received and apron: 0.0015"; stainless steel b. Gutters and downspouts: 0.050"; aluminum 2.5 FABRICATION OF GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. General: The fabrication requirements for gutter and downspout work apply to both shop fabricated and on-site-fabricated work. Shop fabricate work to greatest extent possible. B. Fabrication Standard: Fabricate work as shown and, where not otherwise shown, fabricate to comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry standards; (SMACNA Fig. 1-19A or Fig. 1-16B; modified by the design indicated on the Drawings). Fabricate downspouts similar to SMACNA Fig 1-32B. 13017 ©2013 OMS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 C. Fabricate work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks. Provide uniform, neat seams. Except where otherwise shown, hem sheet metal on concealed side of exposed edges. D. Support and Anchorage: Fabricate units with adequate provisions for support and anchorage. Provide downspout anchors at top, bottom, and at 5' o.c. (SMACNA Fig. 1-19A or Fig. 1-13B). E. Seaming: Fabricate gutters with joints, lapped in the direction of flow. Rivet and seal joints with epoxy seam sealer, then tape on the inside of all gutter joints to make joints water-tight, and with sufficient strength to prevent failure. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 2 Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2 coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Roof Edge Trim and Flashings: Secure metal trim and flashings at roof edges according to resist forces for specified wind zone. 13017 ©2013 OMS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). E. Seams: Install nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. F. Sealed Joints: Install nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. G. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. H. Install flashing receivers to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated. Where shown in masonry, furnish flashing receivers to Installer of masonry work for installation as work of Division 4 sections. 1. Either install the flashing receivers into the masonry work or supervise its installation. The successful installation of this work is the responsibility of the Installer of this Section, not the Installer of the masonry work. I. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Anchor apron to receiver to prevent "walking". Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with mastic sealant. J. Roof Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. K. Install gutters in accordance with Drawings, recommendations of SMACNA, and good practice. Support gutter as required, independent of roof edge metalwork or drip-edge, (SMACNA Fig. 1-16B or Fig. 1-19A). L. Install downspouts not less than 1" away from wall and fasten to the wall at top, bottom, and at not to exceed 5 feet o.c. between, with "stand-off" type brackets, (SMACNA Fig.1-35, C or H), anchored into the brick joints. Telescope joints not less than 1-1/2 inches, in the direction of water flow. 1. At open downspout ends, provide an elbow facing away from the building. If downspouts from a high roof terminate on a lower roof, provide splash pans fabricated similar to SMACNA Detail (Fig. 1-36, Alternate Section), not less than a 2'- 6" opening with at least three perforated diverter bars perpendicular to the flow, weeped and spaced at the edge so that water will drain completely from the pan. M. Install removable "beehive" type strainer guard at each downspout drop. N. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. 13017 ©2013 OMS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1 SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Walls and partitions 2. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction B. The work includes firestopping for mechanical and electrical systems, refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for additional details. Coordinate this work with mechanical and electrical installers. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. All Division 3-28 Sections of the Project Manual 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings 2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection- rated openings B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 2 E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. Fire Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. F. Certification by Installer that installation complies with Indiana Building Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. It is the explicit intent of this specification to require that all firestopping Work on this Project be performed by a single Installer; who is trained, experienced, and certified by the materials manufacturer to perform this type of work, and who shall certify to the Owner that the building is firestopped in accordance with the Building Codes of the State of Indiana. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is qualified by having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to an Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 3 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory" E. Firestopping information is not specifically indicated on the Drawings. It is the responsibility of this Installer to coordinate penetrations requiring firestopping with other Installers and to comply with the Indiana Building Code. F. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through- penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 4 C. Notify inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories may include the following items: 1. Permanent forming, damming, or backing materials, including the following: a. Slag- or rock-wool-fiber insulation b. Sealants used in combination with other forming, damming, or backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board d. Fillers for sealants 2. Temporary forming materials 3. Substrate primers 4. Collars 5. Steel sleeves C. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." D. This Section will not specify materials to be used to perform firestopping. It is the responsibility of the Installer to use appropriate materials and systems Listed in the U. L. Fire Resistance Directory, latest edition, which will firestop the field conditions encountered, which will provide the performance described, and will comply with the Indiana Building Code. 2.2 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 5 C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 2.3 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 6 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming, damming, or backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to 13017 ©2013 OMS THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 7 produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency 4. Date of installation 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name 6. Installer's name 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for locations indicated in Sealant Schedule at end of this Section. B. Sealants used in glazing are specified in Division 8 "Glazing". 1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to field mock-up of masonry to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and workmanship. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation of joint sealants to occur before application of water repellent, and interior finishes, unless otherwise acceptable to sealant manufacturer, in writing, and acceptable to Architect. 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Uses: Refer to Sealant Schedule appended to end of this Section. C. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1. Match Tremco Beige. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with following requirements for Uses: 1. Uses M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. B. Multi-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade P, Class 25, and complying with following requirements for Uses: 1. Uses M, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: a. "Dynatrol II"; Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolastic NP 2"; Sonneborn Building Products. c. "Dymeric"; Tremco Inc. d. "Vulkem 922"; Mameco International. 2. Multi-Part, Pourable, Urethane Sealant for Use T: a. "NR-200 Urexpan"; Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant"; Sonneborn Building Products. c. "THC-900"; Tremco Inc. d. "Vulkem 245"; Mameco International. 2.4 ELASTOMERIC SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. One-Part Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with following requirements for Uses: 1. Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3 B. One-Part Silicone Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade P, Class 25, and complying with following requirements for Uses: 1. Uses M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. One-Part Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Low modulus. a. "790"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Silpruf"; General Electric Co. c. "864"; Pecora Corp. d. "Sonolastic Omniseal"; Sonneborn Building Products. e. "Spectrum 1"; Tremco Corp. 2. One-Part Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Medium modulus. a. "791/975"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Silglaze N"; General Electric Co. c. "895"; Pecora Corp. d. "Spectrem 2"; Tremco Corp. 3. Two-Part Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Surface modified, medium modulus. a. "756-HP"; Dow Corning Corp. 4. One-Part Silicone Sealant for Use T: a. "890-SL"; Dow Corning Corp. D. One-Part Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints of nonporous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. Use for sanitary sealant for toilet fixtures. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. "Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corp. 2. "SCS 1702 Sanitary"; General Electric Co. 3. "898 #345 White"; Pecora Corp. 4. "Proglaze White"; Tremco Corp. 5. "Sonolastic OmniPlus"; Sonneborn Building Products. 2.5 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 1. 7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15 percent. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4 1. Acrylic Sealant: a. "60+Unicrylic," Pecora Corp. b. "Mono," Tremco, Inc. 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent and nonoutgassing. 2. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing. 3. Any material indicated above. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 1. Provide primer for all porous substrates, CMU, brick, stone, concrete, etc., irrespective of manufacturer's recommendations. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and following requirements: 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with proper movement of joint, and adhesion of joint sealant, including mortar, dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates of all porous materials and where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at same time sealant backings are installed. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean-off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 SEALANT SCHEDULE SEALANT SCHEDULE Description Sealant A. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces: 1. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete, walks and mowing strips between the building and these surfaces. 2. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 3. Joints between different materials listed above. 4. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. 5. Control and expansion joints in ceiling (soffits) and overhead surfaces. 6. Other joints where indicated. Silicone; Low Modulus or Medium Modulus. [Silicone Two-Part Medium Modulus, 756-HP] Use two-part silicone where sealant fluid migration, fluid streaking and/or dirt pick-up would occur and adversely affect building materials aesthetically. B. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces: 1. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 2. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. 3. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 4. Other joints where indicated. Polyurethane or Silicone; Low Modulus. 13017 ©2013 OMS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7 SEALANT SCHEDULE Description Sealant C. Toilet fixtures. Silicone, Mildew- Resistant. D. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces: 1. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 2. Other joints where indicated. Polyurethane or Silicone; Medium Modulus. E. NOTES: 1. Install joint sealer indicated in joints fitting descriptions and locations listed, as well as in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Installer is responsible to select the proper sealant, for the use intended, within this Specification. Use of Type S sealant is the option of the Installer, provided proper installation can be made within the conditions at the Project, including temperature, moisture, etc., and selected color. 3. Acrylic sealant may be used for "non-moving" interior and exterior joints, such as perimeter of windows, doors, louvers and similar penetrations where surfaces on one or both sides are indicated to be painted. END OF SECTION 07901 13017 ©2013 OMS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 - 1 SECTION 08112 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fabricated, commercial quality steel doors and frames for doors and related openings, modified for this Project. B. Door hardware and installation is specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. 1. Manufacturer's certificate stating that each assembly required to be fire rated but exceeding sizes of tested assemblies has been constructed to conform to design, materials, and details of construction equivalent to requirements for labeled units. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames work. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide steel doors and frames manufactured by a firm specializing in production of this type of work, including requirements specified. 1. Fabrication methods and product quality shall meet standards set by Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100) and as herein specified. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store doors and frames at Project site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, including special requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products 3. Curries Co. 13017 ©2013 OMS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 - 2 4. Metal Products, Inc. 5. Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality, level, carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569, free of scale, pitting, or surface defects. C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16 gage sheet metal. Galvanize after fabrication units to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. E. Shop Applied Paint: Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as base for specified finish paints on steel surfaces. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide flush design doors, 1-3/4 inches thick, seamless hollow construction. Join door face sheets at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending the full height of door or by stitch welding and filling the remaining gaps with epoxy seam sealer the full height of door, with no visible joints or seams on faces or vertical edges. 1. For single acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 2. Unless otherwise required for acoustical or thermal doors, provide filler of fiberboard, mineral wool board, or other insulating material solidly packed full door height to fill voids between inner core reinforcing members. 3. Reinforce doors with rigid tubular frame where stiles and rails are less than 8 inches wide. Form tubular frame with 16 gage steel, welded to outer sheets. B. Painted Exterior Doors: Fabricate exterior doors of 2 outer galvanized, stretcher leveled, steel sheets not less than 16 gage. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges, except around glazed or louvered panel inserts. Provide weep hole openings in bottom of doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 1. Reinforce inside of doors with vertical galvanized sheet steel sections, not less than 22 gage. Space vertical reinforcing not more than 6 inches o.c. and extend full door height. Spot weld at not more than 5 inches o.c. to both face sheets. 2. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 16 gage horizontal steel channels welded continuously to outer sheets. Close top and bottom edges to provide flush, waterproof weather seal, as integral part of door construction or by addition of inverted steel channels. 3. Provide thermal-rated assemblies with U value of 0.24 BTU/hr(F) or better. C. Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Minimum gages of steel reinforcing plates for following hardware: 1. Hinges and Pivots: Manufacturer’s standard. 2. Lock Front, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: 12 gage. 3. All Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 14 gage. 13017 ©2013 OMS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 - 3 2.4 FRAMES A. Fabricate frames of full welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, continuously welded full depth and width of frame. Knock-down type frames are not acceptable. 1. Form exterior frames of minimum 14 gage galvanized steel sheets. 2. Form interior frames of either cold or hot-rolled sheet steel of following minimum gages: a. Openings up to and including 4'- 0" wide: 16 gage. b. Openings over 4'- 0" wide: 14 gage. B. Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Minimum gages of steel reinforcing plates for following hardware: 1. Hinges and Pivots: Manufacturer’s standard. 2. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 12 gage. 3. Surface Mounted Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 12 gage. C. Jamb Anchors: Furnish jamb anchors as required to secure frames to adjacent construction, formed of not less than 18 gage galvanized steel. Provide 2 anchors at top hinge and 1 anchor for each additional hinge. 1. Metal Stud Partitions: Insert type with bent angle clip by length to engage web of steel stud (1-1/4" to 1-3/4", coordinate with type of steel studs proposed by installer of Section 05400 and 09255), welded to back of frames. Provide at least 4 anchors for each jamb for frames up to 7'- 6" in height; 5 anchors up to 8'- 0" jamb height; one additional anchor each 24 inches or fraction thereof over 8'-0" height. Locate 2 anchors at top hinge, one above and one below the hinge. D. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed of not less than 14 gage galvanized steel sheet, as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors, with 2 holes to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions. E. Head Reinforcing: For frames over 4'- 0" wide in masonry wall openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, not less than 12 gage for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. F. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. G. Rubber Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped doors, drill stop in strike jamb to receive 3 silencers on single door frames and drill head jamb stop to receive 4 silencers on double door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. H. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or dust cover boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close-off interior of openings. I. Drip Cap: Provide a steel drip cap welded to head of exterior door frames which will prevent water from intruding across top of door. Extend bent lag at 45 and extend not less than 3/4 inches. Bottom of drip shall allow door free movement. Completely seal top of drip. 1. Fabricate from 16 gage galvanized steel. 13017 ©2013 OMS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 - 4 2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Provide stops and moldings. Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame. Provide removable stops and moldings formed of not less than 20 gage steel sheets matching steel of frames. Secure with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12 inches o.c. Form corners with butted hairline joints. B. Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of installation. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and finish smooth, flush, and invisible. B. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. C. Thermal Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations, provide doors and frames that have been fabricated as thermal insulating assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 or C 976. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide assemblies U-value rating of 0.34, or less, Btu/(hr by sq ft by deg F). D. Finish Hardware Preparation: As follows: 1. Prepare doors and frames to receive finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, mortising, drilling, and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface applied finish hardware may be done at Project site. 3. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings, or if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute. E. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel doors and frames, including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 2. Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate solution (SSPC-PT2), hot phosphate solution (SSPC-PT4), or basic zinc chromate-vinyl butyryl solution (SSPC-PT3). 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint within time limits recommended by pretreatment manufacturer. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils. 4. Apply asphaltic paint to throat of exterior frames and to frames for use in wet environments, such as shower rooms. 13017 ©2013 OMS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Frames: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of size and profile as indicated. 1. Install frames and accessories in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. 2. Setting Masonry Anchorage Devices: Provide masonry anchorage devices where required for securing frames to in-place concrete or masonry construction. a. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance with details on final shop drawings and anchorage device manufacturer's instructions. Leave drilled holes rough, not reamed, and free from dust and debris. 3. Floor anchors, in slab-on-grade, may be set with powder actuated fasteners. Set all other frames with drill-in masonry anchorage devices and machine screws. 4. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. b. Place frames at fire rated openings in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. c. Make field splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, weld and finish to match factory work. d. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured. B. Doors: Fit non-fire rated doors accurately in their respective frames, with following clearances: 1. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch. 2. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch. 3. Bottom: 3/8 inch, where no threshold or carpet. 4. Bottom: 1/8 inch, at threshold. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION 08112 13017 ©2013 OMS FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing of wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Steel door frames for flush wood doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames”. C. Door hardware and installation is specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. D. Glass for flush wood doors is specified in Division 8 Section “Glazing”. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of door. Including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings; include product data on finishing doors. B. Shop Drawings: Indicating location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations for cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Verification: Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory finished doors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with both of following standards; if there is a difference, comply with AWI. 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors," of the National Wood Window and Door Association. Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements. a. For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors. 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", 7th Edition, Version 1.0, for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. 13017 ©2013 OMS FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons. B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed markings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, HVAC system is operating, temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with requirements of referenced quality standards for Project's geographical location. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 inches by 84 inches section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of following: 1. Solid Core Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company c. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division d. Graham Manufacturing Corp. e. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. f. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co. g. Ohio Valley Door Corporation h. V-T Industries 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with following requirements: 1. Grade: Premium (Grade A faces). 2. Faces: Select White Maple, plain sliced 13017 ©2013 OMS FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match 4. Match within Door Faces: Running match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets. 6. Stiles: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces. 7. Construction: PC-7 (Particleboard core, 7-ply). 8. Core: Particleboard core, LD-2, with blocking for hardware. 9. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then abrasive-plane entire unit before veneering. B. Blocking for Solid Core Doors: 1. Provide wood blocking at particleboard core doors of same thickness as core and with minimum dimensions as follows: a. 5 inch top rail blocking. b. 5 inch bottom rail blocking. c. 5 inch by 18 inch lock blocks. d. 5 inch midrail blocking. 2.3 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood beads matching veneer species of door faces. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Size doors at factory to fit frame opening sizes indicated, with following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile specified in "Light Frames" paragraph. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. B. Finish wood doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. 13017 ©2013 OMS FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane or manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to AWI System TR-6. 3. Staining: As selected from manufacturer’s standards. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging door. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. Reject doors not uniform in color and grain. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 13017 ©2013 OMS ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1 SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes following types of access doors: 1. Ceiling access doors for attic access. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer. B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under "Submittals" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bilco, Inc. 2. Cendrex, Inc. 3. Elmdor Manufacturing Co. 4. J.L. Industries 5. Karp Associates, Inc. 6. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 7. Milcor, Inc. 8. Nystrom, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim: Units consisting of frame with exposed trim, door, hardware, and complying with following requirements: 1. Frame: 0.0598 inch thick zinc-coated steel sheet. 2. Door: 0.0747 inch thick zinc-coated steel sheet. 3. Trim: Flange integral with frame, 3/4 inch wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. 13017 ©2013 OMS ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 2 4. Hinge: Continuous type. 5. Locks: Flush, screwdriver operated cams with one key-operated cylinder lock per door. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. 1. Provide 2’- 0" X 4’-0” access doors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For gypsum board assemblies, furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board. C. Locking Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. Provide not less than one cylinder lock on each access door. Other locks, if required, may be screwdriver type. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish 2 keys per lock and key all locks alike. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. C. Install concealed-frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08305 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: 1. Exterior entrance doors 2. Vestibule and interior doors matching entrance doors 3. Transoms 4. Frames for entrances 5. Storefront type framing system for windows 6. Insulated aluminum-faced spandrel panels in exterior door. 7. Glazed-in muntin grids 8. Provide access and routing for power and systems wiring for security system as identified in hardware sets and on Electrical Drawings. Coordinate location of supplementary steel reinforcement within framing and similar attachments to facilitate routing and wiring; indicate coordination on shop drawings. B. Joint sealants installed as part of aluminum entrance and storefront systems are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". C. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes the following: 1. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. 2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members. C. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance. D. Wind Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Static Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not exhibit evidence of material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category. 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2 E. Dead Loads: Provide entrance and storefront system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. 1. Provide a minimum 1/8 inch clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. 2. Provide a minimum 1/16 inch clearance between members and operable windows and doors. F. Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. 1. Minimum live load normal to plane of assembly: 30 psf, unless otherwise indicated. G. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sf of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sf. H, Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not indicate water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 8.00 lbf/sf. Water leakage is defined as follows: 1. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage. I. Thermal Movements: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. J. Structural Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural movements including sway and deflection. K. Condensation Resistance: Provide storefront systems with condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 52 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. L. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, and attachments to other work. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of entrance and storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of entrance and storefront systems, and are based on specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval and only to extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 2. Design Standard: a. Exterior Framing: “TriFab 451T”; Kawneer Corporation b. Interior Framing: “TriFab 450 (2” sightline x 4-1/2” depth), Kawneer Corporation D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. Cross Aluminum Products 3. EFCO Corporation 4. Manko 5. Tubelite Division Architectural Systems 6. United States Aluminum Corp. 7. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with requirements of standards indicated below. 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429 4. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10 B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot-rolled sheet and strip. C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing" D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance requirements. F. Sealant: For use as weatherseal, compatible with other system components with which it comes in contact, and that accommodates a 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at time of application when measured according to ASTM C 719. 1. Sealant: Silicone 2. Color: Black 3. Use neutral-cure silicone sealant with insulating glass units G. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type. PVC gaskets are not acceptable. H. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied, asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 mil thickness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard 1-3/4 inches thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125 inch thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: As indicated on Drawings; provide manufacturer’s standard nominal widths to accommodate design intent. 3. Bottom Rail: 12 inches nominal width. 4. Cross Rail: 2-1/2 or 8 inch nominal width as indicated on Drawings. 5. Head Rail: 6 inches minimum width. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5 C. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length. 1. Overall Panel Thickness: 1-inch. 2. Exterior and Interior Skin: Aluminum. a. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard for finish and texture indicated. b. Finish: Match door and framing system. c. Texture: Smooth. d. Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch thick, tempered hardboard. 3. Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer’s standard extruded-polystyrene board or rigid, closed-cell, polyisocyanurate board as standard with Manufacturer. 4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Glazed-In Muntins: Provide fully-assembled, applied, extruded aluminum, nominal 1-inch wide, muntin grids as indicated on Drawings and designed for field installation over glazing. Provide muntin grids with perimeter glazing flange to allow muntin grid to be placed against the glass surface and glazed in along with the glass. Provide matching grids for interior and exterior of windows with grids aligned exactly back-to-back to simulate divided lights. Finish muntin grids to match storefront framing. E. Subsills: Provide manufacturer’s standard thermal-break subsills for exterior aluminum storefront and window units. F. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners, and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast iron, malleable iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. H. Exposed Flashing: Aluminum, ASTM B 209, not less than 0.032 inch thickness, match finish of adjacent aluminum materials. I. Concealed Flashing: Dead soft, 0.018 inch thick stainless steel, complying with ASTM A 666, of type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with system. J. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as follows: 1. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements. 2. Sliding Weather Stripping: Wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing complying with AAMA 701 requirements. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for requirements for hardware items. 2.5 FABRICATION 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6 A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 1. Fabricate components for shear-block frame construction. B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation, and moisture occurring or migrating within system to exterior. E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. F. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual." G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. I. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory-install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory installed hardware before finishing components. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. Interior Doors: Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.16 silencers at stops to prevent metal-to- metal contact. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7 D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members. F. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. G. Install, adjust, and lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install glazing and muntin grids to comply with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing". I. Install sealant weatherseal according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to provide weatherproof joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". K. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with following maximum tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. 13017 ©2013 OMS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 8 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth operation, and weathertight closure. B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure entrance and storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08410 NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included: A. Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification. B. Related work: 1. Division 1 – General Requirements 2. Division 8 – Steel Doors and Frames 3. Division 8 – Wood Doors 4. Division 8 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets: 1. Cabinet Hardware. 2. Signs, except as noted. 3. Access doors and panels 1.2 Quality Assurance A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications. 2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act. 3. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. B. Hardware Supplier: 1. Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 100 miles of the project. The distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). C. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Before hardware installation, General Contractor/Construction Manager will request a hardware installation meeting be conducted on the installation of hardware; specifically that of locksets, closers, exit devices, overhead stops and coordinators. Manufacturer's representatives of the above products, in conjunction with the hardware supplier for the NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 2 project, shall conduct the meeting. Meeting to be held at job site and attended by installers of hardware for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Meeting to address proper coordination and installation of hardware, per finish hardware schedule for this specific project, by using installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates, physical product samples and installation videos. 2. When any electrical or pneumatic hardware is specified this meeting shall also include the following trades/installers: Electrical, Security, Alarm systems. 3. Convene one week or more prior to commencing work of this Section. 4. The Hardware Supplier shall include the cost of this meeting in his proposal. D. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 1.3 Submittals: A. Hardware Schedule 1. Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed in Division 1. 2. Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise. 3. Schedule will include the following: a. Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set. b. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as follows: CATEGORY SPECIFIED SCHEDULED Hinges Manufacturer A Manufacturer B Lock sets Manufacturer X Manufacturer X Kick Plates Open Manufacturer Z c. Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations. d. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing. e. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. f. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. g. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets. h. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions and specialty hardware. i. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved." j. Typed Copy. k. Double-Spacing. l. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets m. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols. B. Product Data: 1. Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware. 2. Submit product data with hardware schedule. NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 3 C. Samples: 1. Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample, if required, of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. 2. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units, which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. D. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, the factory order acknowledgement numbers for the various hardware items to be used on the project. The factory order- acknowledgement numbers shall help to facilitate and expedite any service that may be required on a particular hardware item. General Contractor/Construction Manager shall keep these order acknowledgement numbers on file in the construction trailer. 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: A. Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor. 1.5 Warranties: A. Refer to Division 1 for warranty requirements. B. During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not. 2.2 Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, it is understood that this is the owner’s Building Standard and "no substitution" is allowed. A. Hinges: 1. Furnish hinges of class and size as listed in sets. 2. Numbers used are Ives (IVE). 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives 5BB1/5BB1HW b. Hager BB1279/BB1168 c. Stanley FBB179/FBB168 1) Provide the correct hinge size, weight and other features based on the hardware sets listed below. NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 4 B. Continuous Gear Hinge: 1. 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, anodized finish (cap on entire hinge painted if specified). Manufacture to template, uncut hinges non-handed, pinless assembly, three interlocking extrusions, full height of door and frame, lubricated polyacetal thrust bearing, fasteners 410 stainless steel plated and hardened. All hinge profiles to be manufactured to template bearing locations, with standard duty bearing configurations at 5-1/8” spacing with a minimum of 16 bearings: and heavy duty at 2-9/16” spacing with a minimum of 32 bearings. Anodizing of material shall be done after fabrication of components so that all bearing slots are anodized. 2. Length: 1" less than door opening height. Fastener 12-24 x 1/2" #3 Phillips keen form stainless steel self-tapping at aluminum and hollow metal doors, 12- 1/2" #3 Philips, flathead full thread at wood doors. 3. Furnish fire rated hinges "FR" at labeled openings. 4. Numbers used are Ives. a. For Wood and Hollow Metal frames; 1) Ives 224HD 2) Equal products by Select Products Ltd. will also be accepted. b. For Aluminum and FRP frames; 1) Ives 112HD 2) Equal products by Select Products Ltd. will also be accepted. C. Padlock: 1. Case hardened steel shackle, 2" shackle clearance height. Capable of being keyed into building key system. D. Locksets and Latchsets – Heavy Duty Cylindrical Type: 1. Function numbers listed are Schlage. 2. Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. 3. Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond doorframe trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors. 4. Locksets and Latchsets: a. Best 93K b. Sargent 10 Line c. Schlage ND 5. Lockset Trim: a. Best 16K b. Sargent LB c. Schlage Athens E. Keypad Locks: 1. Manufacturer: a. Schlage CO Series 2. Lever Design: a. Schlage Athens F. Exit Devices: NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 5 1. Exit devices shall be touchpad style, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware. 2. All exit devices shall incorporate a fluid damper, which decelerates the touchpad on its return stroke and eliminates noise associated with exit device operation. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. All latchbolts to be deadlatching type, with a self-lubricating coating to reduce wear. 3. End-cap will be sloped to deflect any impact from carts and they shall be flush with the external mechanism case. End caps that overlap and project above the mechanism case are unacceptable. End cap shall utilize a two-point attachment to the mounting bracket. 4. Touchpad shall match exit device finish, and shall be stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes. Only compression springs will be used in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls. 5. Plastic templates shall be included with each exit device to facilitate a quick, easy and accurate installation. 6. Strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a locking plate to prevent movement. 7. All rim and vertical rod exit devices shall have passed a 5 million(5,000,000) cycle test based on ANSI A156.3, 1994, Grade 1 test standards and certified by an independent testing lab. 8. All mortise exit devices shall have passed a 10 million(10,000,000)cycle test based on ANSI A156.3, 1994, Grade 1 test standards and certified by an independent testing lab. 9. Provide cylinder dogging on panic exit hardware where noted in hardware sets. 10. Exit devices shall be UL listed panic exit hardware. All exit devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware. 11. Lever trim for exit devices shall be vandal-resistant type, which will travel to a 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set. 12. Von Duprin 98 Series. Series and function numbers as listed in sets. 13. Trim: a. As specified in sets. b. Levers to match lockset design where specified. G. Push and Pull Hardware: 1. Push Bars: Von Duprin 350 2. Pull, Offset: One inch round rod, 90 degree offset, 18 inch centers. 3. Manufacturer: Provide push and pull hardware from any member of B.H.M.A. H. Closers: 1. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder. Cylinder body shall be 1 ½” in diameter, and double heat treated pinion shall be 11/16” in diameter with double D slab drive arm connection. 2. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to –30 degrees F. 3. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 4. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forged forearms for parallel arm closers). 5. All surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. 6. Closers will have Powder coating finish certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification. NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 6 7. Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers and supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule. 8. LCN Series as listed in sets. I. Overhead Holders and Stops: 1. Type, function and fasteners must be same as Glynn-Johnson specified. Size per manufacturer's selector chart. Plastic end caps, hold open mechanisms and shock blocks are not allowed. End caps must be finished same as balance of unit. 2. Manufacture products using base material of Brass/Bronze for US3, US4, & US10B finished products and 300 Stainless Steel for US32 & US32D finished products. 3. Type, function, and fasteners must be the same as Glynn-Johnson specified. Size per manufacturer's selector chart. a. Glynn-Johnson b. Architectural Builders Hardware J. Kick Plates: 1. Furnish .050 inches thick 8" high x door width less 1-1/2" at single doors and less 1" at pairs. Where glass or louvers prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2”. 2. Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable. K. Bumpers: 1. Wrought, forged, or cast, approximately 2-1/2 inch diameter, convex or concave rubber center, concealed fasteners. a. Ives WS402CCV b. BHMA L02101. L. Thresholds: 1. 1/2" high - 5" wide. Cope at jambs. 2. Furnish full wall opening width when frames are recessed. 3. Cope in front of mullions if thresholds project beyond door faces. 4. Furnish with non-ferrous Stainless Steel Screws and Lead Anchors. a. National Guard as listed in sets b. Equal of Zero or Reese M. Door Sweeps: 1. Surface Sweeps: a. National Guard as listed in sets b. Equal by Zero or Reese N. Weather-stripping: 1. Apply to head and jamb stops. 2. Solid Bar stock all sides a. National Guard as listed in sets b. Equal by Zero or Reese NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 7 O. Meeting Stile Weather-stripping: 1. 2 Pc. Nylon brush type to seal gap between pairs of doors. a. National Guard as listed in sets b. Equal by Zero or Reese P. Smoke and Draft Control Seals: 1. Gaskets must comply with IBC (2006) Part 2, UL1784 (1995), and NFPA 105 (1999) for use on all ‘S’ labeled wood and hollow-metal Positive Pressure door assemblies. 2. Perimeter Seals: a. National Guard 2525 b. Zero c. Reese 3. Meeting Stile Astragal Seals: a. National Guard 2525 b. Zero c. Reese 4. Smoke Seals for doors with overlapping astragals: a. National Guard 2525 b. Zero c. Reese Q. Key Control: 1. Key Cabinet a. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3 way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the project. b. Provide complete cross-index system set up by hardware supplier or Lockset manufacturers representative or Lockset Manufacturers authorized Service Center. Place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. Provide hinged panel type cabinet for wall mounting. Provide one each wall mounted key cabinet. c. Telkee WC Series with key loan record system. d. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in their proposal. R. Miscellaneous: 1. Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in Hardware Sets. S. Fasteners: 1. Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type screws are not acceptable. 2. Sex bolts will not be permitted on reinforced metal doors. NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 8 2.3 Finishes: A. Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626. Provide finish for each item as indicated in sets. 2.4 Templates and Hardware Location: A. Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers. B. Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge. C. Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates. 2.5 Cylinders and Keying: A. All cylinders for this project will be supplied by one supplier regardless of door type and location. B. Provide a cylinder for all hardware components capable of being locked. C. Final cores shall be furnished by the owner’s locksmith. D. Provide cylinders with construction cores or keying for use during the construction period. The owner or owner’s agent will convert construction cores or keying to the final system. E. At the request of the Architect and when performing changeover from construction key system to final key system deliver to the Architect or Owner’s Representative the following: a. 2 each Temporary construction keys. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. General: 1. Install hardware according to manufacturers’ installations and template dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture of the item. 2. Provide blocking/reinforcement for all wall mounted Hardware. 3. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames will be drilled and tapped for machine screws. 4. Solid wood doors and frames: full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting screws. Door closers installed on wood doors shall be supplied with through-bolts and machine screws. 5. Continuous gear hinges attached to hollow metal doors and frames and aluminum doors and frames: 12-24 x 1/2" #3 Phillips Keenform self-tapping. Use #13 or 3/16 drill for pilot. 6. Continuous Gear Hinges require continuous mortar guards of foam or cardboard 1/2" thick x frame height, applied with construction adhesive. 7. Install weather-strip gasket prior to parallel arm closer bracket, rim exit device or any stop mounted hardware. Gasket to provide a continuous seal around perimeter of door NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 9 opening. Allow for gasket when installing finish hardware. Door closers will require special templating. Exit devices will require adjustment in backset. B. Locations: 1. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. 2. Include this list in Hardware Schedule. CATEGORY DIMENSION Hinges Door Manufacturer's Standard Flush Bolt Levers 72" and 12" Levers Door Manufacturer's Standard Exit Device Touchbar Per Template Offset Pulls Suitable for Exit Devices Pulls - Flush Cup 46" Wall Stops/Holders Centerline of Lever C. Final Adjustment: 1. The general contractor shall provide the services of a representative to inspect material furnished and its installation and adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware. 2. Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the factory representative to insure correct installation and proper adjustment in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also recording locations and kinds of non-compliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware supplier, hardware installer and building owner. D. Technical and Warranty Information: 1. At the completion of the project, the technical and warranty information coalesced and kept on file by the General Contractor/Construction Manager shall be given to the Owner or Owner’s Agent. In addition to both the technical and warranty information, all factory order acknowledgement numbers supplied to the General Contractor/Construction Manager during the construction period shall be given to the Owner or Owner’s Agent. The warranty information and factory order acknowledgement numbers shall serve to both expedite and properly execute any warranty work that may be required on the various hardware items supplied on the project. 2. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, and door closers. 3.2 Hardware Sets: SPEXTRA: 64954 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 001 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 001 PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 10 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 002 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 002 PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 003 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 003 004 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH 2 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD 628 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-9849-EO 626 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-9849-NL-OP-110 626 2 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-102 XQ11-948 626 1 EA SFIC RIM HOUSING 80-129 626 1 EA SFIC CONST. CORE 80-035 3 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190 18" O 630 2 EA OH STOP 100S 630 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 689 2 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4020-18G 689 1 SET MEETING STILE SEAL FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 41 00 1 SET DOOR SEAL FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 41 00 2 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A CL 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S SIA NS 2 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD 628 1 EA DUMMY PUSH BAR 350 626 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190 18" O 630 2 EA OH STOP 100S 630 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 689 2 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4020-18G 689 1 SET MEETING STILE SEAL FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 41 00 1 SET DOOR SEAL FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 41 00 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50BDCD ATH 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 11 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 004 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 005A 009 010 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 005 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 005B PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 006 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 007 011A PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50BDCD ATH 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA KEYPAD LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-ATH-BD 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 1 1/2" LDW B4E 630 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA KEYPAD LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-ATH-BD 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 1 1/2" LDW B4E 630 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 12 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 007 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 008 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 008 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 014 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 009 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 011B PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA KEYPAD LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-ATH-BD 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 ST-1544 689 1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4020-18 689 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 1 1/2" LDW B4E 630 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S ATH 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 13 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 010 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 012 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 011 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 013 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH HARDWARE GROUP NO. 012 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 015 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD 628 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-98-NL-OP-110-1439 626 1 EA SFIC RIM HOUSING 80-129 626 1 EA SFIC CONST. CORE 80-035 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190 18" O 630 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 689 1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4020-18G 689 1 SET DOOR SEAL FURNISHED UNDER SECTION 08 41 00 1 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A CL 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S SIA NS 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S ATH 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80BDCD ATH 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY NEW BRANCH BANK September 5, 2013 First Merchants Bank Carmel, Indiana Odle McGuire Shook Project Number: 13017 DOOR HARDWARE 08_71_00 PAGE -- 14 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH END OF SECTION 1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-102 626 1 EA FINAL CORE FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. 626 1 EA BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 1 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows 2. Doors 3. Glazed entrances and storefront framing 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed of 90 miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 1) Classification of Building: III. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 2 2) Exposure Category: C. 3) Importance Factor: 1.15. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a nominal 1/2-inch-wide interspace. 3. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL- 35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For verification purposes, in form of 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated, except for clear monolithic glass products and wired glass, and of 12-inch-long samples of each color required for each type sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant and gasket samples between two strips of material representative in color of adjoining framing system. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. 1. Show locations of safety glass where required by code. It shall be the submitter=s responsibility to indicate on the submittal all areas requiring safety glass in compliance with Indiana Building Code requirements. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating following products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 3 1. Tinted float glass 2. Coated float glass 3. Insulating glass 4. Glazing sealants 5. Glazing gaskets F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Tinted Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated. D. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated. E. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. G. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with experience and capability to conduct testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines”. I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of following inspecting and testing agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 4 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating- glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of products indicated in schedules at end of Part 3. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at end of Part 3. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at end of Part 3. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 5 2.4 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Insulating-Glass Schedule at end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated or required. B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in Insulating- Glass Schedule at end of Part 3 are nominal and overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: 1. Manufacturer's standard sealants. D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products meeting required conditions. 2.7 GLAZING GASKETS A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 6 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 7 C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 8 B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following: 1. Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass: Annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with performance requirements. 2. Uncoated Clear Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: Kind HS (heat strengthened). 3. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered). B. Schedule: 1. Interior Doors: 1/4” thick clear tempered glass. 2. Interior Windows: 1/4" thick double strength clear float glass, tempered where required by Code or as noted. 3.7 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Insulating Glass for Windows, Doors and Sidelights: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide uncoated insulating-glass units complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide products of one of the following: a. Arch Amarlite b. Cardinal IG c. Glassmont d. Guardian Industries e. Oldcastle Glass f. Indy Glass g. Interpane Coatings h. North American i. Viracon 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Annealed; provide tempered where required by Code for exterior doors and sidelights. 5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass. 13017 ©2013 OMS GLAZING 08800 - 9 a. Class 2 (tinted, coated, heat absorbing, and light reducing). 1) Tint Color: “Solargray” by PPG Industries 2) Coating: “Sungate 500” by PPG Industries, Low E, on #3 surface of insulated unit. b. Annealed; provide tempered where required by Code for exterior doors and sidelights. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 37. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.35. 8. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.35. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40. 3.8 GLAZING SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Where glazing sealants of this designation are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. 790; Dow Corning. b. Silpruf; GE Silicones. c. UltraPruf SCS2300; GE Silicones. d. 864; Pecora Corporation. e. Omniseal; Sonneborn, Div of ChemRex, Inc. f. Spectrem 1; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. B. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Where glazing sealants of this designation are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. 791; Dow Corning. b. 795; Dow Corning. c. Spectrem 2; Tremco. d. Tremsil 600; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. END OF SECTION 08800 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Non-load bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 3. Interior mold & mildew resistant gypsum wallboard for exterior walls. 4. Tile backing gypsum board. 5. Moisture resistant gypsum board. 6. Blocking required for installation of equipment, fixtures, casework, cabinets, millwork, and similar items. B. Load bearing and non-load bearing steel framing are specified in Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing". C. Wood blocking is specified in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.3 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: All gypsum board assemblies shall be considered to have STC ratings, minimum 45 - 49 (WP 1070). Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined in compliance with ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. For gypsum board assemblies not indicated to have STC ratings, provide maximum STC attainable with construction indicated, including sound attenuation insulation and acoustical sealant at all partitions. Where a higher STC is specifically indicated, provide additional work in accordance with test requirements. 2. Comply with practices and recommendations in ASTM C 919. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Where fire rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance in compliance with ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with all applicable publications of the Gypsum Association for installation, finishing, and any repair to gypsum board assemblies in addition to manufacturer=s requirements for same. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 2 C. Single Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer. D. Single Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. E. Single Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes unless otherwise indicated. B. Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing complying with ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Screw-in anchor 2. Chemical anchor 3. Drilled-in expansion anchor C. Powder Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Not acceptable. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. E. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. F. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (25 gage), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 525. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3 G. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (25 gage), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 525. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with following requirements: 1. Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft. 2. Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 525. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 inch wide minimum lip (return) and complying with following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 20 gage unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: As indicated on drawings. 3. Special long leg runners: Minimum 20 gage, with legs sufficiently long to adequately support studs at top and allow clearance for live load deflection and thickness of fireproofing. C. Steel Furring Channels: 1. Thickness: 22 gage unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 1-1/2” unless otherwise indicated. D. Accessories: Provide vertical slide clips, attachment angles, and similar accessories required for a complete system and to fully support framing. Provide bridging, blocking, and bracing. E. Blocking: Provide blocking for anchorage and securement of all materials, equipment, fixtures, and similar elements to gypsum board assemblies, walls, partitions, and surfaces. Provide wood blocking in accordance with Division 6 where wood blocking is required. a. For railings, grab bars, upper cabinets, wall hung casework, and other items where similar loading is expected provide 12 gage galvanized steel sheet x 6 inches wide by stud spacing sized channels with 90 degree flanged ends for attachment to web of framing members; fasten with self-drilling corrosion-resistant screws, screwed into heavier gage piece; or provide 2 inches by 6 inches wood blocking securely anchored to steel stud framing with additional framing, clips, or similar devices. b. For toilet partitions, and urinal screens, and similar vertically oriented elements provide vertical 2 inches by 6 inches wood blocking centered on toilet partition and vertical 2 inches by 12 inches wood blocking centered on urinal screen. Provide blocking not less than 6 feet long. Securely anchor to steel stud framing with additional framing, steel clips, steel blocking or similar devices. c. For towel bars, coat racks, door stops, counter tops, wall hung cabinets, projection screens and other items where similar loading is expected provide 16 gage x 6 inches wide galvanized steel sheet by stud spacing sized channels with 90 degree flanged ends for attachment to web of framing members; fasten with self-drilling corrosion- resistant screws, screwed into heavier gage piece; or provide 2 inches by 6 inches wood blocking securely anchored to steel stud framing with additional framing, clips, or similar devices. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 4 d. For base and floor supported wall cabinets, toilet accessories, tackboards, and other items where similar loading is expected, provide 20 gage by 6 inches wide galvanized steel sheet by stud spacing sized channels with 90 degree flanged ends for attachment to web of framing members; fasten with self-drilling corrosion-resistant screws, screwed into heavier gage piece; or provide 2 inches by 6 inches wood blocking securely anchored to steel stud framing with additional framing, clips, or similar devices. F. Steel Z Furring Section: 1. Thickness: 20 gage unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 1/2” unless otherwise indicated. G. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing, blocking, and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with recommendations of steel framing and gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 1. Provide not less than #12-14 pan head sheetmetal screw into 16 gage steel; not less than #10-16 pan head sheetmetal screws into 20 gage steel; not less than #8-18 pan head sheetmetal screws into lesser gage steel. Provide number of screws or other fasteners required to develop structural capacity of framing and blocking; space fasteners not closer than recommended by steel framing manufacturer. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396 and as follows: 1. Type: Type X for all conditions. 2. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 442 or, where backing board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard, ASTM C 1396, same as specified above. D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M. 1. Type: Type X 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch 3. Use at toilet rooms on walls not covered with Ceramic Tile or similar finish. D. Interior Mold & Mildew Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Coated inorganic glass mat-faced back and paper-faced front, enhanced mold & mildew resistant gypsum core wallboard, 5/8 inch thick; conforming to the physical properties of ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1177 on glass mat back. Rating of 10 "No Mold Growth" as tested for 4 weeks according to ASTM D 3273. 1. Type: Type X for all conditions with polyethylene vapor retarder for interior face of all exterior walls. 2. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. DensArmorTM Interior Guard manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corporation. b. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Type X Gypsum Panels manufactured by United States Gypsum Co. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5 c. Gold Bond Brand XP manufactured by National Gypsum Co. d. ProRoc moisture and mold resistant gypsum board manufactured by Certainteed. E. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. . B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 1. Type: Type X. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Dens-Shield Tile Backer" manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. b. “GlasRoc Tile Backer” Type X manufactured by Certainteed. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with following requirement: a. Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. c. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. d. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. B. Zinc Accessories for Exterior Ceilings: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints formed from rolled zinc complying with ASTM C 1047, in shapes indicated below by reference to ASTM C 1047: 1. Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated 2. Edge trim complying with ASTM C 1047, formed from rolled zinc, shape LC-Bead per Fig. 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Use zinc trim in wet or humid areas; toilets, locker rooms, and similar areas. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and recommendations of both manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6 1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. 2. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Latex Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies complying with ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant: a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. c. "Sta-Stuck", Sound Seal #0909A; National Gypsum Co. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA-98, Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick 2. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. E. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing): 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, Thickness and maximum permeance rating to be 6.0 mils, 0.13 perms. Seal with pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.” PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, and structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, Gypsum Association, or, if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition and wall framing abut structure provide long leg deflection channel assembly consisting of deflection track and top runner track (plate track). a. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints to attain lateral support and to avoid axial loading. 3. Where studs pass by structure framing install vertical slide clips and attachment angles to provide for vertical movement in structure. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing members. Provide control joints in ceilings, soffits, bulkheads, and walls where indicated, if not indicated provide joints in accordance with Ahandbook@, but not farther apart than 30 feet on centers. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8 and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620-inch (8-gage) diameter, 4 feet o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners)): 1-1/2 inch, 4 feet o.c. 3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. G. Provide control joints not farther apart than 30 feet on center, each direction. Joint locations not indicated on Drawings shall be approved by Architect, in the field, for visual affect. Provide additional joint material as required to satisfy field conditions as directed by Architect. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns, and where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs or furring channels are installed directly against exterior masonry or concrete walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For STC rated and fire-resistive rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to underside of floor or roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9 floor or roof slabs and decks, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 2. Terminate partition framing at or above suspended ceilings only where indicated. 3. Where ceiling plenum is used for "return air", terminate non-fire rated partitions and non-acoustical rated partitions 6 inches above ceiling and diagonally brace or extend stud framing and bridging to building structural framing to resist minimum 5 lbf/sf live load. D. Install steel studs in sizes indicated and at spacings not farther apart than 1'-4" o.c. E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in same direction and so that leading edges of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Provide not less than 2-20 gage steel studs, back-to-back and screw attached to each other at not more than 1'- 0" o.c., each side of each door frame. Provide 2-18 gage steel studs for wall heights greater than 12 feet. Provide 2-16 gage steel studs for wall heights greater than 18 feet. Coordinate attachment to door frame anchors, if required provide 20 gage runner track, minimum 1'- 0" long, at each anchor, to attach double studs to door frame anchors. 2. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. Provide additional bracing where required. G. Frame openings other than door openings in same manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. H. Provide control joints not farther apart than 30 feet on center, each direction. Where possible, locate control joints at head of door frames or window openings unless indicated otherwise. I. Install metal or wood blocking for surface mounted equipment, fixtures, accessory, including wall mounted door stops, wall mounted railings, wall mounted light fixtures and other wall mounted items. Fasten blocking to studs. In all cases secure blocking in manner and with such anchors, screws or bolts, which will develop structural resistance required to support materials, equipment, fixtures, and similar elements requiring blocking. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1. Install and finish fiber-reinforced, abuse-resistant gypsum wallboard in accordance with manufacturer=s recommendations and instructions. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install wall and partition board panels to minimize number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 10 E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. I. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. 1. If not indicated, provide control joints at not more than 30 feet o.c. Locate where acceptable to Architect. Provide double framing at each joint, including double framing doors and openings where joints occur at these openings. K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, steel beams and joists and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, beams, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to-1/2 inch wide joints to install sealant. L. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments and at intersecting walls of dissimilar materials. Provide 1/4 inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with casing bead trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Paint exposed joints or apply colored tape prior to erection of gypsum board. Color selected by Architect. M. Steel stud partitions shall have sound attenuation insulation, full height of each partition. Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations. Provide a continuous bead of acoustical sealant centered on each track, and a bead for each layer of gypsum board. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's instructions for tested assembly which will develop maximum sound reduction for construction indicated. N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 11 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall or partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions or walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, comply with the following: 1. Install tile backing gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface. C. Single Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. D. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 3. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Corner Beads: 1. Install steel corner beads at all vertical external corners of walls and partitions. 2. Install steel corner beads at external corners of windows. 3. Install steel corner bead to all horizontal oriented outside corners (e.g. bulkheads). Install steel corner bead to vertical outside corners of bulkheads. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi- exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. D. Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to ASTM C 840. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as for maximum dimensions and changes of plane direction. Joint locations not indicated on Drawings, shall be approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 13017 ©2013 OMS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 12 A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and where required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face flanges as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as required to prevent cracks from developing in joint compound at flange edges. D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide following levels of gypsum board finish in compliance with GA-214. 1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire resistive rated assemblies and sound rated assemblies. 2. Level 2 where gypsum board panels form substrates for ceramic tile. 3. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive flat and eggshell paints, light textured finishes, and wallcoverings. E. For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in finishing compound plus two separate coats applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and trim accessories using following combination of joint compounds (not including prefill), and sand between coats and after last coat: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting type joint compound. 2. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting type joint compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Sandable, setting type joint compound. or 4. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready mixed, drying type, all purpose or topping compound. F. Where level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat. G. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat. H. Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting type joint compounds to prefill joints and embed tape, and for first, fill (second) and finish (third) coats, with last coat being a sandable product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for sanding. Sand between coats and after finish coat. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic floor tile 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with following values as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. B. Load Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated for following load bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project: 1. Extra Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 14. 2. Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and construction indicated. Where products involve color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required. 2. Full size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 3. Metal edge strips in 6 inch lengths. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of following products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Joint sealants. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. Maintain temperatures above 50 deg F in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the specified products indicated in the Room Finish Schedule on the Drawings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grout products by the following: 1. Tile Setting and Grouting Materials: a. TEC Incorporated. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article. 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with following requirements: 1. Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: Where factory mounted tile is required, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile Products are specified in the Interior Finish Legend on Drawing A301. B. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Coved floor tile base. b. External Corners for Thinset Installations: Surface bullnose. c. Internal Corners: Field butted square corners, except with coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A118.4, unless otherwise indicated, and as specified below: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job mixed portland cement. a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. b. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in F-2.1.2. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.11, composed as follows: 1. Mixture of Dry Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry mortar mix and liquid latex additive complying with the following requirements, or a "single step" latex modified thinset that requires only the addition of clean water to exceed ANSI A118.4: a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. b. Single step latex modified thinset mortar 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as follows: 1. Mixture of Dry Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory prepared, dry grout mix and latex additive complying with following requirements: a. Sanded Dry Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 1/8 inch and wider. b. Unsanded Dry Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. b. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. 2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C920. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. One Part, Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. One Part, Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealants: a. Dow Corning 786; Dow Corning Corporation. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant; Pecora Corp. d. Rhodorsil 6B White; Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. e. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco, Inc. 2. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealants: a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik. b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International, Inc. c. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corp. d. THC-900; Tremco, Inc. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, and as indicated in the Finish Schedule. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; coordinate in consultation with Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds in compliance with tile setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package exhibit same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile properly. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay-out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. F. Lay-out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. If joints are not indicated, locate and construct joints in accordance with TCA EJ171. Do not saw cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: See tile installation sheets at the end of this section. C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards: 1. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 2. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Completed installation shall meet all of the following: 1. Layout: a. No small or excessive amounts of cuts. No cuts smaller than half size except where approved by Architect or where required to fit around openings in wall. b. Balanced cuts. 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 7 c. Areas centered. 2. Straight and True Work: a. Wall areas plumb. b. Surfaces true to plane within all available finish tolerances. 3. Smoothness of Installation: a. Corners of tiles are flush with corners of adjacent tiles. b. Edges of tile are on an even plane and feel smooth to the touch. Light cast across surface does not show tile out of plane or alignment. 4. Joint Lines: Straight and of even width including miters. Note: Lines shall remain straight even if they are required to vary slightly from thick to thin to compensate for tile that is, by character, slightly varied in size. 5. Cut Tile: a. Tiles have been stoned smooth with a carborandum stone and do not show jagged or flaked edges. b. No tiles are cut (split) to fit around pipes. (Drill holes in tile which are not scored.) 6. Shading of tile is harmonious although there may be slight variations. 7. Bonding: Tile are well bonded and sound solid when tapped with a hard object or are tested with a chain. Tile which sound hollow are not acceptable. Architect will test tile at random, not less than 6 tile per surface may be removed to determine percent of bond. Tile which are not bonded over 95% of surface are not acceptable. 8. Appearance of Tile: Complete work is free of pitted, chipped, cracked, or scratched lines. 9. Cleanliness of Tiles: Tile surfaces have been washed upon completion of setting and grouting. 10. Condition of Grout: a. Uniform color. b. None of setting materials are showing. c. Dense and cured to maximum hardness. d. Smooth, without voids, pin holes, or low spots. e. Tooled or struck to depth of cushion edged tile. Uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 13017 ©2013 OMS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 8 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09310 13017 ©2013 OMS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Single Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet-work in spaces is completed and dry work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any). 13017 ©2013 OMS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver usable extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Panel Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings which comply with requirements indicated on Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Wide Face, Capped, Double Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated or hot-dipped galvanized, according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges; and other characteristics as follows: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty System with cross-tees capable of simple span uniform load of minimum 8.7 lbs./lineal foot with a maximum deflection of L/360 when supported 4 feet on center. 2. End Condition of Cross-Runners: Butt-edge. 3. Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted to match color of acoustical unit. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Provide nickel-copper alloy wire, ASTM B 164, UNS No. N04400. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch (12 gage) diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust inhibitive paint. F. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust inhibitive paint. G. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed with 0.0396 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, G 90 (ASTM A 446M, Z 275) Coating Designation, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. H. Sheet Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 13017 ©2013 OMS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Wide Face, Steel Capped, Double Web, Steel Suspension Systems: a. Prelude ML or XL (w/7301 m.r.); Armstrong World Industries, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than half width panels at borders, and conform to layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 3. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings." 4. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 25-2. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Splay hangers only where required, and if permitted with fire-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of 13017 ©2013 OMS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to drilled-in anchors. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members only. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers,unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Provide additional hangers at each corner of each lay-in light fixture, and similar devices and conditions. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for fire resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 13017 ©2013OMS RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 1 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile B. Resilient Base and Edge Strips are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories". 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. B. Submit samples of full-size tiles for each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. C. Product certificates, instead of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. D. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products complying with ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more complying with ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 complying with ASTM E 662. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. B. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F. 13017 ©2013OMS RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 2 B. Do not install tiles until they are at same temperature as space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 25 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE a. Products: Refer to Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of trowelable underlayment, patching compounds, and adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer. 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 13017 ©2013OMS RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 3 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds complying with tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, joints, holes, and level depressions in substrates. C. Vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. D. Apply concrete slab primer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns, and sizes as indicated on Drawings. D. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor, install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. I. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J. Hand roll tiles, with a weighted roller, to firmly adhere tile to substrate. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 13017 ©2013OMS RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 4 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09651 13017 ©2013 OMS RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - EXECUTION 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples in manufacturer's standard sizes, of each different color and pattern of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products in compliance with ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more complying with ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 complying with ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in dry spaces protected from weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. B. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F. B. Do not install products until they are at same temperature as that of space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section. 13017 ©2013 OMS RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation of products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each different type and color of resilient wall base and accessory installed. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I, and requirements specified in Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. 1. Gypsum-based compounds are not acceptable. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of products specified will occur to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds complying with manufacturer’s directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. 13017 ©2013 OMS RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products specified using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2. Install outside corners before installing straight pieces. 3. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at point where corner is formed or by coping to fit. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. C. Clean products specified not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09653 13017 ©2013 OMS CARPET TILE 09690 - 1 SECTION 09690 - CARPET TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet tile, installation, and accessories. B. Resilient Base and Edge Strips are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories". 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of carpet tile material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. B. Shop drawings showing layout and placement of cut tiles. Indicate pile or pattern direction, start points, and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tile. Show installation details at special conditions. C. Samples in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of colors, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the following: 1. Full-size carpet tile of each type required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Tile Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet tile identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet tile with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70 (ASTM D 2859). Rating: Pass. 2. Flame Spread: Critical radiant flux to meet Class I when tested by ASTM E 648, (glue down). 3. Smoke Density: 450, when rated by ASTM E 662. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation on underside of 4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet within 48 hours, fully taped at perimeter to substrate. 13017 ©2013 OMS CARPET TILE 09690 - 2 B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper applied. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of material and full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. For carpet tile CTL-C provide 4 boxes of full- size units. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace carpet that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion, except where a longer period is offered by manufacturer. C. Warranty shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Carpet Tile: Refer to Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Installation Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided by or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. 1. Gypsum-based leveling and patching compounds are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to receive carpet tile; apply sealer to prevent dusting. 13017 ©2013 OMS CARPET TILE 09690 - 3 B. Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish was chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Replace missing pieces of existing resilient flooring or patch to level. Cut out peaked sheet goods seams and fill with latex underlayment. D. Remove chemical finish on terrazzo; patch grout lines and cracks to level with latex Portland cement-based underlayment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of carpet tile; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile, unless otherwise indicated. B. Extend carpet tile under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet tile is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. D. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. Perimeter tiles shall be half-size or larger. E. Dry-fit sections of carpet tile prior to application of adhesive. F. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. G. Adhere perimeter tiles and partial tiles with a full spread of adhesive. Dry-fit cut tiles and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut. In corridor areas, use full tiles down center and cut perimeter tile borders. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet tile surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet tiles where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. C. Vacuum carpet tile clean. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet tile is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09690 13017 ©2013 OMS CONCRETE FLOOR COATINGS 09805 - 1 SECTION 09805 - CONCRETE FLOOR COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes applying floor coatings to concrete floors, including surface preparation, prime coats, and topcoats. B. Types of floor coating systems required for the Project include the following: 1. Clear urethane over epoxy primer (CFC). C. Coat exposed concrete floor surfaces indicated in the Finish Schedules. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each coating system specified, including primers and topcoats. 1. Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 3. Provide "Material Safety Data Sheets" for each material. Maintain one set at Project site. B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has successfully completed coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for this Project. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material produced by same manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages, and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Application instructions. 6. Color name and number. 7. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONCRETE FLOOR COATINGS 09805 - 2 1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying the coatings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), unless otherwise required or recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds manufacturer's recommendations; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating operation. 2. Work may continue during inclement conditions only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and temperature and humidity within area can be maintained within limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPECIAL COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, finish coat material, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the highest grade of the various coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best grade product will not be acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which coatings will be applied for compliance with requirements on applying coatings. Surfaces to receive coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied. 1. Do not proceed with coating application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of application will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces, substrates, and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove items already in place that are not to be coated. Following the coating operations in each space or area, have removed items reinstalled by workers skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONCRETE FLOOR COATINGS 09805 - 3 C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's instructions for substrate condition and as specified. Provide a profile similar to 100 grit sand paper and which is acceptable to the manufacturer of the primer and top coating. 1. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare concrete to receive special coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve concrete curing, use mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer to prepare surface. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish coats to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. b. If allowed by manufacturer, in writing, acid etch concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive special coatings with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other proprietary cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to remove acid, and neutralize with ammonia and rinse; allow to dry, then vacuum. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials according to coating manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings according to manufacturer's directions. 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir in such a way to introduce air. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply floor coatings by roller or other applicators according to manufacturer's directions. Use rollers of material recommended by manufacturer. 1. Do not apply coatings over dirt, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. 2. Number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. 3. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats. Do not recoat until coating has dried in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and where applying another coat does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings according to manufacturer's directions. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by manufacturer. 13017 ©2013 OMS CONCRETE FLOOR COATINGS 09805 - 4 F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from the site. B. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect other work, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations. 2. At completion of other trades' construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR COATING SCHEDULE A. Provide the following coating systems for substrates indicated: 1. Where undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until the cured film is of uniform coating, finish, color, and appearance. 2. Clear Concrete Floor Coatings: indicated by “CFC” on Room Finish Schedule: a. Provide two coatings complying with system performance requirements and manufacturer's printed physical requirements for each coat. Provide not less than 8 mils minimum coating thickness. 1) Primer: Multi- component, polyamide, epoxy primer. a) General Polymers: 3504, Epoxy Primer. b) MAB: Ply-Tile 520 Primer. c) Sauereisen: #501 Primer. d) Sonneborn: Sonothane Prime and Kote. e) Key Resins: #501 Primer/Sealer. f) Color: Transparent. 2) Urethane top coat: Single or multi-component urethane coating. a) General Polymers: 4638 Urethane, clear coating. b) MAB: Monothane, 140-080 clear coating. c) Mrts;Crete: Diathane CRU, clear coating. d) Sonneborn: Sonothane VOC, clear coating. e) Key Resins: #501Primer/Sealer. f) Color: Transparent Gloss. END OF SECTION 09805 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 1 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, field painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces except where indicated, either by schedule, note, or herein, that a surface, material, or item is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If paint schedules do not specifically mention a surface, material, or item, paint surface, material, or item same as similar adjacent surfaces, materials, or items whether or not schedules indicate colors. If schedule does not indicate color or finish, Architect will select from colors and finishes included in schedule. 1. Painting includes field painting bare or covered pipes, ducts, and hangers; exposed bare, primed, or painted steel and metal work; bare, primed, or painted metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, including wireways, raceways and conduit; exposed in rooms and areas scheduled to receive finishes. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. Prefinished items do not include items described above, B.1., regardless of primer or factory applied finish. 1. Prefinished items not painted include following items or components, which may be indicated to be finished at factory or manufacturer's shop in a color or finish selected by Architect. Check each item, specifically, to ensure that it is not indicated to be "field finished": a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic materials. c. Architectural woodwork and casework. d. Wood doors. e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. f. Light fixtures. g. Switchgear in electrical rooms. h. Electrical distribution cabinets, unless they are mounted in or on a surface that is scheduled to receive a finish, e.g. paint or wallcovering. 2. Concealed surfaces not painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in following generally inaccessible areas: a. Furred areas. b. Pipe spaces. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 2 3. Finished metal surfaces not painted, unless specifically indicated, include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or other code required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Shop priming of finish carpentry and architectural woodwork is specified in Division 6. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. "Flat" refers to a finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. "Eggshell" (low-luster) refers to a finish with a gloss range between 10 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. "Satin" refers to a finish with a gloss range between 15 and 30 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. "Semigloss" refers to a finish with a gloss range between 25 and 50 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. "Full gloss" or "high gloss" refers to a finish with a gloss range more than 50 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Provide manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 3. Provide "Material Safety Data Sheets" for each material. Maintain one set at Project site and furnish one set to Owner. B. Samples: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of actual substrate. 1. Provide samples in the form of paint draw downs for each color with required sheen. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 3 project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for this Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Provide block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from same manufacturer as finish coats. C. Definition of Properly Painted Surfaces: "A properly painted surface is one that is uniform in appearance, color, and sheen. It is one that is free of foreign material, lumps, skins, run, sags, holidays, misses, strike throughs, or insufficient coverage. It is a surface which is free of drips, spatters, spills, or overspray which were caused by the contractor's work force. Compliance to meeting the criteria of a properly painted surface shall be determined when viewed without magnification at a distance of five feet or more under normal lighting conditions and from a normal viewing position" (PDCA Standard P1-92). D. Benchmark Samples (Mock-ups): On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. For small areas or items, Architect will designate a small area or item, as required. 1. Final acceptance of colors, texture, and workmanship will be from job applied samples. Architect may direct minor adjustment of color in field. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content, if required or specified. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water based paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 4 B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from same production run as materials applied in quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include products listed in paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: Following manufacturers are referred to in paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 2. Duron Paints and Wallcoverings (Duron). 3. ICI Paint Stores (ICI). 4. M. A. Bruder Paints, Inc. (MAB). 5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 6. Porter Paint Co. (Porter). 7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 8. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec). C. Manufacturers listed above but not scheduled in Part 3, shall certify, in writing, that materials they propose for use in this Project shall meet or exceed performance of materials scheduled. Decision of Architect regarding acceptable matching materials will be final. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best "consumer" quality material of various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Use of "professional" quality material is not acceptable, unless manufacturer of material shall certify, in writing, that quality and formulation of material is identical to manufacturer's best consumer quality, or that material, when applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, will meet or exceed the performance of material 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 5 specified above, and that manufacturer will supervise application and certify that material was applied in accordance with those instructions. C. Colors: Provide colors of finished paint systems to match Architect's scheduled selections and samples as indicated on Interior Finish Legend on Drawing A301. D. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. 1. Lead content in pigment: Not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint manufacturer"s application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 3. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces, substrates, and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect of anticipated problems using materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. Remove rubber silencers from door frames prior to painting. Painting over silencers is not acceptable. Replace silencers after paint has dried. 2. After completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of specified and scheduled coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect, in writing, of anticipated problems using specified finish coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral fiber reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 6 required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written directions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum based solvents so that surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in schedules. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 7 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. Term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Number of coats and film thickness required are same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to manufacturer's directions. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch-up painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in rooms and areas scheduled to be finished. 1. Mechanical items to be painted include: a. Piping, pipe insulation, pipe hangers, and supports. b. Ductwork. c. Insulation coverings. d. Supports. e. Accessory items. 2. Electrical items to be painted include: 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 8 a. Conduit, raceways, wire ways, and fittings. b. Distribution panels and panel boards. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Stipple Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide stipple finish over Level 4 finished gypsum board, walls and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may invoke following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner will engage services of an independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in Contractor's presence. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for following characteristics as required by Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. l. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from site. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 9 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as directed by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide following paint systems over substrates indicated. B. Manufacturers listed under Part 2, but not scheduled below, shall provide materials matching materials scheduled. Decision of Architect regarding acceptability of materials matching those specified is final. C. Ferrous Metal (EFM): Primer is not required on shop primed items. 1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish (EFM3): Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Damp Proof Oxide Metal Primer, #33-015. 2) ICI: Devguard 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. 3) MAB: Rusto-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer. 4) Moore: #163 IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint. 5) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive steel Primer. 6) Porter: 296 Glyptex Metal Primer. 7) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Duron: Weathershield Ext. Acrylic Semi-Gloss, Series 03-3XXX. 2) ICI: Dulux Professional 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss #2406-XXXX. 3) MAB: Four Seasons Latex Trim 324. 4) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096. 5) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof S-G Acrylic Trim Paint. 6) Porter: 6030 Acrylic Semi-Gloss Exterior Paint. 7) S-W: A8 A-100 Latex Gloss House & Trim. D. Zinc-Coated Metal (EZM): 1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish (EZM2): Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 10 1) Duron: Dura Clad Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer, White, #33-100. 2) ICI: Devguard 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. 3) MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II. 4) Moore: #155 IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer. 5) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack DTM Industrial Enamel. 6) Porter: 215 Rust Screen Metal Primer. 7) S-W: A8 A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss House & Trim. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Duron: Weathershield Ext. Acrylic Semi-Gloss, Series 03-3XXX. 2) ICI: Dulux Professional 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss #2406-XXXX. 3) MAB: Four Seasons Latex Trim 324. 4) Moore: #096 MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint. 5) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Trim Paint. 6) Porter: 6030 Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint. 7) S-W: A8 A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss House & Trim. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated. B. Manufacturers listed under Part 2, but not scheduled below: provide materials matching materials scheduled. Decision of Architect regarding acceptability of matching materials shall be final. C. Gypsum Board (IGB): 1. Flat Acrylic Finish (IGB1): Two finish coats over a primer. Use only on ceiling, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer: Latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer, 04-124. 2) ICI: 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Wall Primer-Sealer. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Prime Fast. 4) Moore: #216 Regal First Coat Latex Primer & Underbody. 5) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Latex Primer-Sealer. 6) Porter: 426 Drywall Primer. 7) S-W: PrepRite 200 Latex Primer B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic latex, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. c. Apply a stippled texture to second coat. 1) Duron: Ultra Deluxe Interior Acrylic Latex Flat, Series 44. 2) ICI: 1200 Dulux Professional Matte Flat Latex. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Wal-Shield. 4) Moore: #215 Regal Wall Satin. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Wall Flat Latex Paint. 6) Porter: 689 Hi Hide Flat. 7) S-W: B30W200 ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Low Luster, Acrylic Enamel Finish (IGB3): Two finish coats over a primer. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 11 a. Primer: Latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer, 04-124. 2) ICI: 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Primer Sealer. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Prime Fast. 4) Moore: #216 Regal First Coat Latex Primer & Underbody. 5) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer Sealer. 6) Porter: 1129 Blank-it Primer Sealer. 7) S-W: PrepRite 200 Latex Primer B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Low luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. c. Apply a stippled texture to second coat. 1) Duron: Ultra Deluxe Int. Vinyl Acrylic Low Sheen Enamel, Series 36. 2) ICI: 1403 Dulux Ultra Latex Eggshell Enamel. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Low-Lustre Latex. 4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319. 5) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall Enamel. 6) Porter: 6079 Painter's Friend Eggshell Enamel. 7) S-W: B20W200 ProMar Latex Eg-shel Enamel. D. Ferrous Metal (IFM): 1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish (IFM3): One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer. a. Primer: Quick drying, rust inhibitive, alkyd or epoxy metal primer, as recommended by manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd White Metal Primer, 33-010. 2) ICI: Devguard 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. 3) MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer. 4) Moore: #163 IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint. 5) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 6) Porter: 296 Gyptex Metal Primer. 7) S-W: B50N2/B50W1 Kem Kromik Metal Primer. b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel, as recommended by manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Duron: Wall Kote Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoater, 04-024. 2) ICI: 1407 Dulux Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Alkyd Primer Undercoat. 4) Moore: #217 Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater. 6) Porter: 135 Glyptex Enamel Undercoat. 7) S-W: B49W200 ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 13017 ©2013 OMS PAINTING 09900 - 12 1) Duron: Ultra Deluxe Int Vinyl Acrylic semi-Gloss Enamel, Series 35. 2) ICI: 1407 Dulux Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel. 4) Moore: #333 Moore's Regal AquaGlo Acrylic Latex Enamel. 5) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Enamel Semi-Gloss Latex. 6) Porter: 109 Hi-Hide Semi-Gloss. 7) S-W: B31W200 ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss. E. Zinc-Coated Metal (IZM): Provide following finish systems over zinc-coated metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish (IZM3): Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Acrylic Galvanized metal Primer, White, 33-100. 2) ICI: Devguard 4160 Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. 3) MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II. 4) Moore: #155 IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer. 5) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech Primer DTM Industrial Enamel. 6) Porter: 215 Rust Screen Metal Primer. 7) S-W: B30W200 ProMar 200 Latex Flat. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Duron: Ultra Deluxe Int Vinyl Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, Series 35. 2) ICI: 1407 Dulux Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) MAB: Rich Lux Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Acrylic Latex Enamel #333. 5) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Enamel Semi-Gloss Latex. 6) Porter: 109 Hi-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) S-W: B31W200 ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss. END OF SECTION 09900 13017 ©2013 OMS WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 1 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Primer "release coat" for substrates is Specified as "primer" in Section "Painting". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame resistance characteristics. B. Product certificates signed by wall covering manufacturer certifying materials furnished comply with specified requirements. C. Certified test reports showing compliance with requirements for fire performance characteristics and physical properties. D. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining wall covering. 2. Precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify wall coverings with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description, quality and grade. 3. Fire hazard classification. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume. 13017 ©2013 OMS WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 2 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Do not store roll goods in upright position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg F in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10 days after installation. B. Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting system. Temporary lighting is not acceptable. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials from same production runs as wall covering installed. Package materials with protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Rolls: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERING MATERIALS A. Refer to Room Finish Schedule for manufacturer, style, color, pattern, size, and related requirements for wall covering materials. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. General: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; mildew resistant, nonstaining, and strippable. 1. Adhesive: Heavy Duty Clear Strippable Wallcovering Adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt. 13017 ©2013 OMS WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 3 C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer. 3. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 4. Verify that new gypsum board surfaces have been primed in accordance with Section "Painting", are cured, dry, clean, and are acceptable to receive "strippable" adhesive. 5. Verify that new plaster surfaces have been primed in accordance with Section "Painting", are cured, dry, clean, andand are acceptable to receive "strippable" adhesive. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried. F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. Use a backing plate if seams are cut on wall. Cuts in substrate surface are not acceptable. Installations which are not "strippable", after adhesive manufacturer's recommended drying period, without damage to substrate are not acceptable. C. Match pattern 6 feet above finish floor. D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. Horizontal seams are not permitted. E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. G. Cover surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 1. Term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend wall coverings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. END OF SECTION 09950 13017 ©2013 OMS FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1 SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes portable fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated. 1. Size cabinets for UL rated 4-A; 60-B; C; 10lb. nominal capacity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated. c. J.L. Industries, Inc. d. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co. e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. f. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: a. J.L. Industries, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Nystrom Products Co. d. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 13017 ©2013 OMS FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed. a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material. b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 2. Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet. B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions: 1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated. D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same metal and finish as door. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. 13017 ©2013 OMS FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 3 G. Door Glazing: Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm. H. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch-thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and hollow-metal design. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Break-Glass Strike: Provide manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. B. Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock, with all cabinets keyed alike. C. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. a. Application Process: Vinyl letters. b. Lettering Color: Red. c. Orientation: Vertical. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: 1. Exterior of cabinets and doors, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. 2. Interior of cabinets and doors. 13017 ©2013 OMS FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 4 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: White, semi-gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10520 13017 ©2013 OMS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items. Refer to Schedule on the Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes. B. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. C. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. D. Manufacturer's certification of compliance with ADA and these specifications. E. Maintenance data and instructions including replaceable parts list and service recommendations, for each accessory, to include in the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide toilet accessories as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. All toilet accessories, for the entire project, shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. B. Provide certification, signed by the manufacturer, that toilet accessories provided on this Project comply with requirements specified, including ADA requirements. C. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of toilet accessories and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Accessories having equal characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 13017 ©2013 OMS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034-inch minimum thickness. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60. C. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation, as follows: 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (22 gage) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. 13017 ©2013 OMS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 E. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and theftproof installation, as follows: 1. One piece, galvanized steel, wall hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 2. Heavy duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. F. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 1. Key coin boxes differently from cabinets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, complying with ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 13017 ©2013 OMS HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AND SHADES 12511 - 1 SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AND SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes horizontal louver blinds and room darkening shades. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blinds and shades specified. Include printed data on physical characteristics. B. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds and shades. Provide schedule to verify each location and size scheduled to receive window treatment. Show installation details and relationship to adjoining work. Identify location of blind and shade controls. C. Submit samples of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from the same material to be used for the Work. D. Maintenance data for horizontal louver blinds and shades to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds, shades and finishes for each. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance for each type of window covering. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of horizontal louver blind and shade from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual horizontal louver blind and shade dimensions by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds and shades until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 13017 ©2013 OMS HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AND SHADES 12511 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: a. Eastern Standard Corp. b. Faber. c. Hunter Douglas, Inc. d. Joanna Western Mills Co. e. Kirsch. f. Levolor Corp. g. Louverdrape, Inc. h. Nanik. i. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; (Bali-Graber). j. Verosol USA, Inc. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. General: Provide horizontal louver blinds to comply with requirements in this Section and with the following schedule of blinds: B. Louver Material: Aluminum. 1. Nominal Louver Width: 1 inch (25 mm) (miniblinds). C. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand. 1. Length of Tilt Control: 12” above bottom of window frame or 3’-6” from finish floor. 2. Position of Tilt Control: Left side, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tilt: Full. D. Cord-Lock Operation: Cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. 1. Position of Cord Lock: Right side, unless otherwise indicated. E. Cord Equalizers: Self-aligning to maintain horizontal louver blind position. F. Valance: Match color of louvers. G. Mounting: Inside window jambs H. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full color line including metals. I. Product(s): As follows: 1. Manufacturer's Name: Levolor Corp. a. Product Name: "Riviera" 1" WIDTH. Color to be selected from 50 available colors. 13017 ©2013 OMS HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AND SHADES 12511 - 3 2.3 SHADES A. Shades: Manually operated room darkening shades equivalent to MechoShade Systems “Mecho/5 SlimLine System smooth operating roller shade system with single channel room darkening channel for light control. B. Sizes: Field verify each window location for width and length required for shade. C. Mounting: Inside window jamb, mounted from top bracket. Provide heavy duty mounting bracket as recommended by manufacturer. D. Single Fabric Shade Cloth: Provide thermoveil fabric, single thickness, non-raveling, .030 inch thick vinyl fabric, woven from .018 inch diameter extruded vinyl yarn; comprised of 21% polyester and 79% reinforced vinyl. 1. Shade Cloth: 3000 Series Satin and Diamond Twill Patterns; reversible fabric. Color as selected from manufacturer’s full range of available colors. 2. Provide matching color snap-on fascia. E. Cut shade cloth to suit window size by means of edge sealing hot knife system. Top of shade cloth to be attached to Snap-Loc spline. Bottom of shade cloth to include smooth, concealed hembar; heat sealed on all four sides. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029 for each horizontal louver blind unit consisting of louvers, rails, cord locks, tilting mechanisms, tapes, and installation hardware. B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating materials. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than jamb to jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than head to sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. 3. Shade Units: Per manufacturer’s recommendations for proper operation of shade. D. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; support blind units under conditions of normal use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of horizontal louver blinds. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION 13017 ©2013 OMS HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AND SHADES 12511 - 4 A. Provide blinds and shades at specified locations per schedule at the end of this Section. B. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass lites or room darkening shades. 1. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head. C. Install shades in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean blind and shade surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation. B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that horizontal louver blinds and shades are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AND SHADE SCHEDULE A. Horizontal Louver Blind Schedule: 1. Locations: a. Window in Cafeteria. b. Exterior door in Cafeteria; provide keepers for bottom of window blinds to hold firmly to door. c. Window in Large Group Instruction; mount against windows. B. Shade Schedule: 1. Manufacturer's standard as follows: a. Locations: Window in Large Group Instruction; mount on room side of window blinds. END OF SECTION 12511